Final Pts 12cc348

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY الشركة السعودية للكھرباء

PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012

PLANT NO. INDEX PTS NO PAGE NO REV.

REVISIONS

DRAWN BY THM DATE CHK’D BY APPROVED

BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. AL-SAFFAR ________ ______ DATE :____________________

THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION OR FOR ORDERING MATERIALS UNTIL CERTIFIED AND DATED

NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

1 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.

SCOPE OF WORK/TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 380kV CABLE LINE FROM GT AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS AT QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

CONSTRUCTION OF 380kV CABLE LINE FROM

GT AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS AT

QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION

FINAL

PTS-12CC 348

(ATTACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B” OF CONTRACT NO. #####/00)


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

2 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION Page I INTRODUCTION 1.01 GENERAL 5 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 5 1.03 PROJECT SUMMARY 5 1.04 DEFINITION OF TERMS 6 II BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES 2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 7 2.02 KICK-OFF MEETING 8 2.03 BASE DESIGN PHASE 8 2.04 BASE DESIGN REVIEW 11 2.05 PROJECT DRAWINGS 11 2.06 PROGRESS REPORTING 16 2.07 QA/QC REQUIREMENTS 17 2.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 28 2.09 TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS 28 2.10 TEST RECORD BOOK 29 2.11 PLANT TAGGING OF EQUIPMENT AND INDEPENDENT COMPONENTS 29 2.12 CONTRACTOR/COMPANY'S CONSTRUCTION SITE OFFICE AND FACILITY 30 2.13 LOSS PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS 31

2.14 OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS 34 2.15 SHUTDOWN/OUTAGE COORDINATION 34

III SCOPE OF WORK 3.01 GENERAL 36 3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK 37 3.03 CIVIL WORK 38 3.04 INDUSTRIAL SECURITY AND FIRE FIGHTING 38 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 3.05 MECHANICAL WORKS 39 3.06 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENTS, CALCULATIONS AND DRAWING 40 3.07 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 44

3.08 PROJECT INTERFACE 45 3.09 STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS 46 IV ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA AND REQUIREMENTS 4.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 53 4.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 53 4.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 54


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

3 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION Page V EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS 5.01 GENERAL 57 5.02 380kV POWER CABLES 57 5.03 380kV CABLE TERMINATIONS & SPLICE KITS 58 5.04 GROUNDING CABLE FOR LINK BOX AND GROUNDING ROD FOR LINK BOX 5.05 BONDING LEADS & SHEATH SECTIONALIZING 59 INSULATORS 59 5.06 LINK BOXES 59 5.07 SHEATH VOLTAGE LIMITER 59 5.08 CABLE WARNING TAPES 59 5.09 WARNING POSTS 59 5.10 PVC CONDUITS & FITTINGS, AND HDPE DUCTS 60 5.11 INDUSTRIAL SECURITY AND FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 60 5.12 VENTILATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 61 5.13 PLUMBING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 62 VI INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES 6.01 GENERAL 63 6.02 REEL STORAGE 63 6.03 REEL HANDLING 63 6.04 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION 64 6.05 380kV CABLE ENTRY INTO SUBSTATION AND CONNECTION INTO GIS 67

6.06 OTHER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 68 VII COMMISSIONING/TESTS 7.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 69 7.02 ELECTRICAL TESTS FOR NEW 380kV XLPE CABLES 69 7.03 ELECTRICAL TESTING OF LINK BOX 70

7.04 FIELD TESTS ON 380kV CABLES 71


PTS-12CC348, 02-12-2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

4 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.

SCOPE OF WORK/TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONSTRUCTION OF 380kV CABLE LINE FROM GT AT

QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS AT QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDICES APPENDIX- I LIST OF ATTACHED CONCEPTUAL DESIGN AND REFERENCE DRAWINGS APPENDIX- II MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES APPENDIX- III TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS FORMS APPENDIX- IV BID STANDARD FORMAT APPENDIX- V OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS

APPENDIX- VI COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX- VII PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (by other Contractor)

APPENDIX-VIII CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS APPENDIX- IX N/A APPENDIX- X N/A

APPENDIX- XII N/A

APPENDIX-XIII SPECIAL TOOLS & EQUIPMENT (by other Contractor)

APPENDIX- XVI GEOTECHNICAL AND CONCRETE INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING (APPLICABLE IF REQUIRED)

EXHIBIT- 1 COMPANY FORM NO.16511 (2/10)


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

5 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION I - INTRODUCTION 1.01 GENERAL

This Scope of WORK and Technical Specifications (PTS-12CC348) and the associated PROJECT Conceptual Drawings, which are Attachment I to Schedule "B" of CONTRACT No. 00000/00, describe the specific scope of WORK that the CONTRACTOR is required to carry out on Lump Sum Turnkey basis until the successful commissioning and integration of the proposed 380kV Underground Cables along with Fiber Optic Cables and control/instrumentation cables between GT AT Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION.

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

This PROJECT will provide Three (3) 380kV Underground cable circuits between GT AT Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION along with Fiber Optic and control/instrumentation Cables with necessary Cable Tunnels, Duct Banks, Hand Holes, and Trenches as applicable for Power Cables along with Fiber Optic and Control/instrumentation Cables.

1.03 PROJECT SUMMARY The summary of the Scope of WORK of this PROJECT, to be carried out by the

CONTRACTOR includes the following: A. Provide and install Three (3) 380kV Underground Cable circuits From GT AT

Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION The approximate route length of each circuit will be as under. Each circuit consist of one run of 1/C-1000 mm2 super clean-XLPE, Cu. conductor, cable per phase complete with all other accessories,

1. Steam Turbine #1 To S/S 9032 : 600M 2. Steam Turbine #02 To S/S 9032: 330M 3. Steam Turbine #03 To S/S 9032: 1000M

B. Provide and install Underground Fiber Optic cable and Control Cables, Complete with all accessories, along the proposed route of 380kV cables, GT at Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032)380KV SUBSTATION

C. Construction of concrete encased duct banks, cable trenches, tunnels and Thrust

Boring/Directional Drilling as required along the proposed route as per COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800062 and TA-800063.

D. DTS System (6 Channel) for each phase of the 380kV Cable along with associated

Cable Heat Sensors.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

6 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


1.04 DEFINITION OF TERMS

The terms, abbreviations and/or expressions frequently used hereinafter shall have the following meaning:

Terms / Abbreviation Meaning

• COMPANY Saudi Electricity Company • U/G Underground • F/O Cable Fiber Optic Cable • CONTRACTOR 380kV Cable Contractor, responsible for the

execution of the Underground Cable Work

*** END OF SECTION I ***


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

7 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION II - BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES 2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. All components and accessories required for the completion and successful

operation of the WORK covered under the scope of this PROJECT, either specified in detail or not, shall be supplied and installed by the CONTRACTOR as necessary.

B. The engineering design and specifications of equipment/materials supplied under

this PROJECT shall be in accordance with this Scope of WORK and Technical Specifications and COMPANY Standards. If the equipment either does not conform to specifications or is not acceptable to COMPANY based on past operating experience/any other reason, the CONTRACTOR shall propose alternative equipment for review and acceptance by COMPANY. However, in case of a conflict in the requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall bring this to the attention of the COMPANY and shall obtain such applicable requirements for this PROJECT in writing from the COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall have no right to decide on his own the requirements in case of such a conflict, and in case of such an eventuality, he will be doing so at his own risk and cost as the COMPANY reserves the right to reject any or the complete part of such WORK arising out of the CONTRACTOR's own decision.

C. The drawings enclosed with this Scope of work and Technical Specifications are

conceptual and for the information of the CONTRACTOR only. The CONTRACTOR should read these drawings in conjunction with this Scope of work and Technical Specifications. The successful CONTRACTOR shall develop detailed design drawings for construction purposes. The engineering and design works under this Contract shall be carried out by an engineering and design firm who has registration to carryout engineering and design works in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The proposed engineering and design firm shall also be from Saudi Electricity Company acceptable list of Engineering & Design firms or shall get pre-qualified before the contract Award for carrying out any engineering and design works for this project.

D. Copies of existing drawings, design calculations, technical reports and other

information as deemed appropriate by the COMPANY may be provided to the CONTRACTOR upon request, if available. However, if such information is not available, then the CONTRACTOR should be responsible for the independent development of the information required to complete the PROJECT specified.

E. The specifications of equipment and materials specified herein are to be considered

as the minimum requirements, and the bidders shall carry out their own basic and detailed design necessary for their proposed specifications.

F. The base design shall be finalized at base design review meeting based on the

guideline drawings issued hereof, manufacturer's drawings, calculations and data sheets, and detailed design shall be finalized based on the base design review and other required information.

G. All documents, drawings data and instruction books to be submitted by the

CONTRACTOR shall be written in English language and Metric Unit system.

H. The submission of final detail drawings shall be progressive and phased out to give sufficient review time to COMPANY.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

8 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


I. COMPANY's acceptance of the CONTRACTOR's design does not relieve him of any part of his obligations to meet all the requirements of the CONTRACT nor the responsibility for the correctness of the design and construction drawings of the PROJECT.

J. All WORK, including services for the test and inspections required by the

COMPANY and demonstrations, if any, for familiarization of maintenance and commissioning, etc., to the COMPANY personnel by the manufacturer's representative shall be arranged / done by the CONTRACTOR.

K. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review and approval, the

demonstration package proposed by him giving the detail/list of equipment and devices that will be demonstrated.

L. Any WORK, which requires shutdown of transmission/distribution feeders or

substation shall be closely coordinated with COMPANY. All outages shall be scheduled at least four (4) weeks in advance.

M The CONTRACTOR’s organizational chart shall be prepared as specified in Instruction to Bidders on Technical Proposal. N. The CONTRACTOR shall submit along with bid proposal the operational spare parts

listed in the pricing attachment "VI' to Schedule 'C' of this Contract. 2.02 KICK-OFF MEETING A Kick-Off Meeting will be held in COMPANY Headquarters shortly after award of

the CONTRACT. This meeting will cover PROJECT implementation, the Scope of WORK, and Schedule and will give the CONTRACTOR an opportunity to discuss all matters related to carrying out his responsibilities.

2.03 BASE DESIGN PHASE A. The base design phase of the PROJECT is a 10-12 weeks period of preliminary

engineering following the kick-off meeting. The purpose of the base design phase is to completely define the PROJECT in enough details to satisfy the COMPANY that all requirements are being incorporated. Information developed during the base design shall be used as a guide throughout the PROJECT and shall be considered binding on both parties, unless operational difficulties or design flaws observed during detailed design review are noted and mandate change. All base design drawings shall be stamped as "Base Design Drawing.”

Coordination meetings will be conducted with the CONTRACTOR's Design team on

regular basis until the design is complete. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit eight (8) sets of the base design document at

least four (4) weeks ahead of the base design review meeting, which shall include, but not limited to the following:

1. Narrative Scope of WORK as proposed by CONTRACTOR:

a. Description of WORK


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

9 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


b. Design Basis and Data c. Testing and Commissioning Procedures d. Maintenance Aspects e. Special considerations including design, construction/operation

constraints (if any), problem areas and proposed solutions. f. Itemized listing of all equipment/facilities to be installed and description

of all WORK to be accomplished. This listing is to be broken down by location, job phase and quantities of like items.

2. Detailed PROJECT Schedule and Critical Path 3. Major Materials Purchase Requisitions (Preliminary) 4. Design Calculations, as a minimum, but not limited to:

a. Detailed Cable Ampacity Calculations as per proposed cable route for

worst case. b. Electrical Interference Study in case the power cable parallels the

communication circuits. c. Calculation of Power Cables Sequence Impedance. d. Calculation for Cable Metallic Sheath Size to withstand System Fault

Current for one second. e. Sheath Induced Voltage Calculations under normal & fault conditions

(for both Single Point Bonding and Cross Bonding Systems) and Selection of Sheath Voltage Limiters (SVL).

f. Calculations for Distributed Temperature Sensing System along with

associated Sensors. g. Structural calculation for duct banks on road crossings

h. Detailed explanation for adopting the major/minor sections arrangement

of the cross bonding. i. Cable pulling tension and sidewall pressure calculations.

5. Soil Investigation Report for Thermal and Electrical Resistivity Measurements along the whole Cable Route at the spacing of 500m.

6. The following Design Drawings, as a minimum, but not limited to:

a. Drawing Control Sheet b. Abbreviations, Symbols and Legends


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

10 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


c. Plot Plan d. 380kV Underground System One Line Diagram e. Hand-hole details for F.O. cable. f. 380kV Power and Fiber Optic and Control Cables Routing Plan and

Profile g. Cable Termination Arrangement Plan, Sections and Details h. Sheath Bonding Schematic Diagram, indicating Minor & Major Section

Lengths. i. Link Box Location, Connections and Joint Bay Details j. 380kV Power and Fiber Optic Cable Routing Sections, Elevations and

Details (with all necessary sections and other utilities in the vicinity of the route)

k. Foundation Details for 380kV Cable Link Box and other Support

Structures l. Details of Trenches, Duct banks, Hand holes, Thrust Boring/Directional

Drilling m. Bonding method and grounding arrangement and details n. Interface diagram with 380kV Switchgear at Qassim Power Plant a

Qassim-4 (9032)380KV SUBSTATION o. DTS System (6 Channel) for each phase of the 380kV Cable along with

associated Cable Heat Sensors. 7. Manufacturers’ Technical Specifications (literature, catalogs, drawings, type

test report and completed Data Schedules) of the following major equipment, including but not be limited to the following:

(Particular type, model should be clearly indicated and/or highlighted):

- 380kV Power Cable - Bonding & Earthing Cables - 380kV Cable Termination/Splice Kits - Cable Supports - Sheath Voltage Limiter - Link Box - Link Box Foundation - Cable Warning Tape - Cable Tiles

- Wire Mesh - Cable warning post - Duct Sealing Units

- Cable Tile Cover


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

11 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


- PVC Conduits and Fittings - Power Cable Clamps

- Fire Proofing Material to Protect the Cable in Cable Basement - Distributed Temperature Sensing System

8. Type Test Reports for Major Equipment/ Materials 9. Factory and SITE Test Program

10. Job Safety Plan (CONTRACTOR’S Loss Prevention Program) 11. SITE Security Plan 12. QA/QC plan

C. The base design submittal shall be submitted fully complete, containing drawings and calculations of all discipline as stated above. Partial submittals or packages are unacceptable and will be rejected. Base design shall include drawings required to define the project. Additional drawings if provided will not be reviewed during the base design phase.

2.04 BASE DESIGN REVIEW After completing the Base Design, the CONTRACTOR shall present the Base

Design Package for technical review along with the Drawing Control Sheet. CONTRACTOR's PROJECT Manager, PROJECT Engineer and the Design/Construction Engineer in each field of specification shall attend the presentation meeting. During this meeting, the COMPANY's comments on the base design package will be reviewed and discussed in detail to finalize the base design for the PROJECT. Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR to be concurred by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

CONTRACTOR may initiate the material procurement WORK during the base

design phase of the PROJECT but the final approval of the material shall be done only after consideration of comments generated during Base Design Phase and resolution of comments during the Base Design Review meeting.

2.05 PROJECT DRAWINGS A. General

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all drawings required for this PROJECT covering all the substations involved in accordance with the requirements of the COMPANY Engineering Drawing Preparation Standards

(SEEDS-II Rev.01).

The drawings shall be assigned with drawing numbers and indexed as outlined in the above procedure. A block of drawing numbers shall be provided by the COMPANY for all new drawings/documents.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

12 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


2. Drawings shall be of uniform size in each discipline as much as possible

and ISO scales hall be 1:10, 1:50, 1:100 and 1:1200, etc.

3. The existing system drawings of the source substation are generally available with the COMPANY in digital or tiff format except in certain cases where it is in the form of hard copies. Copies of existing available drawings shall be provided on CONTRACTOR'S written request. However, if any related information is not available, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to develop all the required drawings to satisfy the PROJECT requirements.

4. The drawings involving modification/expansion of the existing system in source substation shall cover the details of the existing system and interface. The drawings in general shall be computer drafted and compatible with Microstation V8 or above version software computer-aided- design (CAD) system. However, in case of drawings involving modifications to existing drawings, which are not available in digital or tiff format CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to develop all the required drawings. 5. The drawing to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall be of the following

standard size in accordance SEEDS-I & SEEDS-II.

A- Size sheet, 711x1016 mm or (28x40 in.) B- Size sheet, 508x711 mm or (20x28 in.) C- Size sheet, 356x508 mm or (14x20 in.) D- Size sheet, 279x432 mm or (11x17 in.) E- Size sheet, 211x297 mm or (8.27x11.69 in.)

6. Revision of Existing Drawings/ Drawing Control Sheets

a. All existing drawings including common drawings affected by this

PROJECT shall be revised and submitted for COMPAY review as part of CONTRATOR'S design submittals. The drawings in general shall be computer drafted Microstation V8 or above version software in accordance with SEEDS-II Rev.01.

b. For modification WORKS of existing substation, the existing drawings only shall be revised as far as possible. If revising the existing drawings are not feasible or not practical and new drawings need to be developed, then preferably, the same number with additional/different sheet number shall be allotted. New drawings having new drawing numbers shall be created only if drawings of existing system are not available.

c. The drawing involving modification/expansion of the existing system in substation shall cover the details of the existing system and interface. Drawings giving only the isolated views/information of expansion/modification work without details of existing system/interface are not acceptable. If new drawings, developed for modification work of existing system do not cover the complete details of existing system, then the corresponding existing system drawings shall also be modified to show the interface/integration with the new drawings developed, and submitted for COMPANY review as part of CONTRACTOR'S design


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

13 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


submittal.

d. The existing drawings are listed in the drawing control sheet(s) for the substation and covered in more than one (1) drawing control sheet for each of the affected existing substations. The CONTRACTOR shall review/study these various by drawing control sheets and drawing, identify the superseded/latest drawings and if necessary carry out field verification to ascertain the correctness of the existing drawings. Only the appropriate/ correct drawings shall be used for developing the drawings for modification WORKS, While modifying any existing drawing sheet, the sheet will be submitted in duplicate, one marked as existing and the other marked as 'modified'.

e. All the existing drawing control sheets shall be revised to reflect the new

revision numbers of existing drawings revised and to identify the superseded drawings. In addition, a prominent note shall be put on the revised existing drawing control sheet (s) to indicate the new drawing control sheet number, if a new drawing control sheet was developed. (e.g., " See drawing control sheet * CT 906044 for list of drawings developed for C. N. # xxxxxxxxx for ………).

7. Protection/Monitoring System Drawing Format Requirements All drawings shall be titled to explain the full function of the circuits represented

on that drawing including station and equipment names. Drawings shall be designed and produced in order to maximize ease of maintenance and installation. Each drawing shall have a legend included explaining the functions of all devices on that drawing. All equipment shall be labeled and identified on the diagrams as per the designations assigned by the COMPANY. All drawing formats must be approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

a. Protection AC One-Line and Three-Line Diagrams All the Protection/Monitoring System related drawings shall meet

COMPANY Standard TES-P-119.33. b. Wiring Diagrams Wiring diagrams shall be produced for all panels and equipment. Panel

wiring diagrams shall be arranged such that they represent a working view of the panel wiring with terminal blocks and devices arranged on the drawing as they exist in the panels. When possible, it is required to have only one (1) drawing per panel. If it is impossible to include all devices on one (1) drawing, the panel drawing shall be subdivided into sections (vertically or horizontally), making a mosaic of drawings physically representing the panel arrangement.

c. Schematic Diagrams All the Protection related drawings shall meet COMPANY Standard TES-

P119.33


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

14 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


B. Vendor Drawings

1. CONTRACTOR shall prepare all vendor drawings in Microstation V8 or above version software in accordance with SEEDS-II Rev.01 and submit to the COMPANY.

2. Vendor drawings and manufacturer drawings, data schedules, specification sheets installation and operating instructions and any other data required for material or equipment. Requirements of such information are an integral part of the purchase order and shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.

3. Preparation and assignment of vendor drawing numbers shall be in accordance with COMPANY Engineering Drawing Preparation Standard (SEEDS-II Rev.01).

4. All vendor drawings shall be subject to review and approval by the COMPANY at various stages (bid/base design/detail design/construction) of the CONTRACT.

Note: All vendor drawings shall be consistent with main drawings in all respects and the vendor drawings shall clearly indicate all inter references with main drawings and all other vendor drawings as applicable.

C. Base Design Drawings The CONTRACTOR shall submit base design drawings to the COMPANY with his

Base Design Package per Section 3. D. Final Detail Design/Construction Drawings The CONTRACTOR shall submit point wise compliance statement to COMPANY’s

comments and shall obtain approval for all final detail design drawings after incorporating COMPANY comments. All details design drawings shall be stamped as “Detail Design Drawings”. After receiving the approval, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY eight (8) complete sets of all interconnected drawings issued for construction in one (1) submittal. These drawings shall be submitted to the COMPANY to be stamped as “Noted By” before they are stamped and issued to CONTRACTOR’S construction team as “Issued For Construction”, but in no case less than fourteen (14) days prior to the start of construction activity.

No WORK shall be started at site unless all interconnected drawings for a particular

WORK has been fully reviewed and agreed upon by the COMPANY and final construction drawings are available at WORK SITE and with the COMPANY.

CONTRACTOR shall provide a composite list of drawings as a minimum for this

PROJECT as given in Section 3.04. Final detailed design drawings shall be submitted fully complete, by discipline

representing fully the part of the PROJECT to be constructed and all the related drawings. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be rejected.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

15 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


E. As-Built Drawings

1. As the PROJECT nears completion, "As-Built" drawings shall be prepared by

the CONTRACTOR in sufficient details to present an accurate record for COMPANY.

All existing drawings affected by this PROJECT shall be revised and

corresponding existing drawing control sheets shall be updated by the CONTRACTOR. The existing drawing control sheet shall be updated and automated in XLS format. If the existing substation drawings do not have drawing control sheet, then the CONTRACTOR shall prepare new Drawing Control Sheet, which shall include the new and existing drawings. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY for the list of the existing drawings. All Drawing Control Sheets, listing all proposed and existing drawings shall also be submitted in the Base Design submittal.

2. All revisions shall reflect field modifications to engineering flow diagrams,

electrical one-line diagrams, electrical schematic connection and interconnection wiring diagrams; instrument hook-ups, wiring diagrams, terminal connections, dimensioned equipment layouts, all underground installations and other WORK and facilities not normally visible. The CONTRACTOR shall provide "As-Built" drawings showing all field modifications to drawings and diagrams prepared by the Vendors and SUB-CONTRACTORS.

If the CONTRACTOR was given hard copy or tiff image file to existing "As-Built" drawings, then it is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to request the COMPANY at least two (2) months before the Technical completion for the existing "As-Built" drawings and redraw them in Microstation V8 or above version software in accordance with SEEDS-II Rev.01.Updating of existing “As-Built" drawings will not be accepted.

3. As part of “As-Built” drawings submission, the CONTRACTOR shall also

provide the COMPANY three (3) sets of field marked-up drawings reflecting the “As-Built” condition of the particular segment of WORK completed by the CONTRACTOR and distributed, as given below, prior to energization:

- One (1) set shall be retained by the COMPANY at the substation. - One (1) set shall be submitted to the COMPANY.

- One (1) set shall be used for “as-built” by CONTRACTOR’s Engineering and Design Consultants, which shall be included in the final submittal.

4. One (1) sample of original (digital Microstation *.DGN format) and five (5)

check prints from different “As-Built” engineering drawings shall be submitted to the COMPANY to verify the quality of digital Microstation *.DGN format and whether the correct drafting procedure is adopted, one (1) month before initial submission of “As-Built” drawings. Before submitting the final “As-Built” drawings one sample drawing shall be submitted and got approved.

Five (5) copies of the “As-Built” documents shall be submitted to the

COMPANY for review as to adequacy, completeness, legibility and conforming to drafting standards. If returned, the CONTRACTOR shall make


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

16 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


corrections, provide additional data and improve the quality as instructed prior

to resubmittal and COMPANY acceptance. The revised “As-Built” drawings shall be resubmitted within four (4) weeks after commissioning. Five (5) sets of final “As-Built” drawings, one (1) set digital Microstation". DGN format drawings in CD shall be submitted to the COMPANY for records.

2.06 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Weekly PROJECT Progress Reports, in

COMPANY-approved formats for the PROJECT to the responsible COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Soft copy of progress reports shall be submitted along with the hard copy. For this purpose, the total WORK shall be divided into: 1. Engineering and Design. 2. Procurement/ Manufacture/ Fabrication Inspection and Delivery of Materials/

Equipment.

3. Construction and Installation. 4. Testing and Commissioning.

B. The following information shall be included in the Progress Reports:

1. Percent of WORK completed as compared to the weighted schedule used to assess WORK progress.

2. Statement of items worked on and/or completed during the period. 3. Statement of items to be worked on and/or completed during the following

period. 4. Problem areas, which can have an adverse effect on the schedule. 5. Safety statistics and minutes of construction safety meeting and progress

meeting. 6. Manpower and equipment availability against the schedule requirement.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall carry out PROJECT planning/scheduling by using MS PROJECT computer software. All PROJECT schedules shall be submitted in CD.

D. Weekly Progress Meeting shall be conducted between the COMPANY and the

CONTRACTOR during the entire CONTRACT duration of the PROJECT. Other coordination and interface meetings will be conducted, as required. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare the minutes of all meetings. The initial draft shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and concurrence. The CONTRACTOR shall then incorporate the required corrections and submit to the COMPANY one (1) original and two (2) copies after they are duly signed by the authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR. The


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

17 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


COMPANY shall sign one (1) copy in acceptance and furnish it to the

CONTRACTOR and retain the original. In addition, a Weekly Construction Safety Meeting shall be conducted by the

CONTRACTOR's Safety Engineer or PROJECT Engineer. Minutes of meeting shall be forwarded to the COMPANY.

2.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. Quality Management CONTRACTOR shall implement an effective quality management, which addresses

all direct and indirect activities related to the PROJECT to ensure that all contractual conditions are met. Quality planning, quality control, quality assurance and quality improvement shall be part of CONTRACTOR's quality management. To effectively manage the PROJECT quality, CONTRACTOR shall develop a clearly defined PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall be implemented from PROJECT start until completion and communicated at different levels of the PROJECT organization. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall also require manufacturers/suppliers to develop and implement Quality Control Plan/ Inspection and Test Plan for each major material/equipment.

B. PROJECT Quality Plan / Quality Program 1. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall set out the specific quality

procedures and practices, resources, and all activities (in sequence) relevant to this PROJECT. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall address all QA/QC activities during design, procurement, manufacturing/fabrication, delivery, storage, construction, installation, testing and commissioning of all items of WORK and materials/equipment per Scope of WORK and Technical Specification.

2. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall be submitted to the

COMPANY as part of the base design package for review and approval. 3. The PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall clearly define and address

the following: a. The quality objectives to be attained and CONTRACTOR’s commitment

to achieve the objectives in the form of a signed policy statement. The policy statement shall be signed by CONTRACTOR’s management personnel not lower than the person who signed this CONTRACT.

b. Detailed PROJECT organizational chart and specific allocations of

responsibilities and authorities during the different phases of the PROJECT.

CONTRACTOR shall include in the PROJECT organizational chart

QA/QC engineers and inspectors dedicated to quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC). The QA/QC engineers and inspectors shall report directly to the overall PROJECT Manager. The QA/QC engineers


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

18 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


and inspectors shall have adequate experience in their area of

responsibility and shall be responsible for ensuring that all phases of the PROJECT are built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the requirements of the PROJECT Scope of WORK and Technical Specifications. The CONTRACTOR’s Chief QA/QC engineer shall interface directly with the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

CONTRACTOR shall use QA/QC personnel other than those performing

or directly supervising the WORK. The QA/QC personnel shall not report directly to immediate supervisors responsible for producing the WORK being inspected. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC personnel shall be kept free from the pressures of cost, schedule and production and shall be given the necessary authority and independence to perform their roles effectively.

The number of CONTRACTOR’S QA/QC engineers shall be as required in the Instruction to Bidders for Technical Proposal.

c. Procurement Control CONTRACTOR’s PROJECT QA/QC engineers shall review all products

and services prior to procurement to ensure conformance to specified requirements. Procurement control shall include source evaluation and selection, source inspection and evaluation of objective evidence of quality furnished by a supplier against the PROJECT specification.

These products shall cover major materials/equipment and other items

including but not necessarily limited to testing services, fill materials, Portland cement concrete and additives, asphalt concrete, water proofing, steel structures, HVAC materials and equipment, electrical materials, plumbing materials, architectural and finishing materials and formwork materials.

d. Quality Audit CONTRACTOR shall conduct its own internal quality surveillance at

appropriate stages (e.g. design, procurement, construction, installation and commissioning stage) of the PROJECT to determine compliance to and the effectiveness of the PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program. Each element of the PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program shall be assessed at least once during the life of the PROJECT. The schedule and frequency should be adjusted if one or more of the following conditions exist:

i. Result of previous surveillance indicates a need to perform them

more frequently. ii. Significant changes are made in the PROJECT Quality

Plan/Quality Program. iii. Safety, performance or reliability of an item is questionable due to

non-conformance.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

19 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


iv. Verification of corrective action implementation.

Personnel conducting the quality surveillance shall be independent of those having direct responsibility for the specific activities or areas being evaluated or assessed.

e. Non-Conformance Control CONTRACTOR shall ensure that items and services, which do not

conform to specify requirements, are controlled in accordance with documented procedures to prevent unintended use. CONTRACTOR shall identify, document, segregate, evaluate and dispose non-conforming items and services after proper notification of concerned personnel within the CONTRACTOR’s organization.

CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineer/inspector shall re-inspect repaired

and reworked non-conforming items. CONTRACTOR shall not use any repaired item or product unless approved by the COMPANY.

Under this clause, the following definitions apply:

i. Repair - Action taken on a non-conforming product so that it will fulfill the intended usage requirements although it may not conform to the original specified requirements (ISO 8402).

ii. Rework - Action taken on a non-conforming product so that it will

fulfill the specified requirement (ISO 8402).

CONTRACTOR shall develop non-conformance report (NCR) form and submit it to the COMPANY for review and comment. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineers/inspectors shall have the freedom to issue NCRs, verify implementation of corrective actions and prevent use of non-conforming items until the deficiency has been satisfactorily resolved. CONTRACTOR’s Chief QA/QC engineer shall submit bi-weekly site QA/QC reports to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE about non-compliances.

f. Corrective Action CONTRACTOR shall develop, document and implement a system for

determining the root cause of non-conformities and identifying the required corrective actions. New procedures or changes to existing procedures resulting from identification of the root cause and potential root cause of non-conformances shall be documented and implemented. Follow-up action shall be taken to verify effective implementation of corrective action. The identified cause and corrective action should be included in the bi-weekly site QA/QC reports that are required to be submitted to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

20 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


g. Quality Records CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a system for preparation,

maintenance, protection and preservation of quality records. Documents such as inspection reports, field inspection checklist, factory test reports, laboratory test reports, witnessed test reports, inspection logbooks, equipment calibration records/certificates, construction drawings and specifications, approved submittals and non-conformance reports are part of these records. All quality records shall be available at WORKSITE for use and/or reference by CONTRACTOR and COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

h. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment

All measuring and testing equipment and devices, which can affect the quality of construction shall be controlled and maintained. CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement a documented calibration control program indicating equipment calibration schedule and identifying those who are responsible for control of the equipment. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that only properly identified and calibrated measuring and testing equipment are used in the PROJECT. Equipment calibration certificates shall be made available to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE upon request.

i. Document Control CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a documented control

program for the review, approval, revision and distribution of documents for the activities affecting quality. Responsible personnel for revision, issuance and approval of documents shall be identified. Control shall ensure that all pertinent and current issues of appropriate documents are available at locations where they are essential and obsolete or superseded documents are promptly removed. CONTRACTOR shall list all the documents that have to be controlled and shall include PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program, Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan, construction and design drawings, calculations, correspondence, inspection and test reports, field inspection checklist, etc.

j. Material/Equipment Handling, Storage, Identification and Control CONTRACTOR shall verify that material/equipment meet prescribed

contractual requirements and are properly handled, identifiable, traceable, cleaned, preserved and stored.

k. Control of interface and interaction between the COMPANY and

CONTRACTOR and between the CONTRACTOR and its SUB-CONTRACTORS, manufacturers/suppliers, QA/QC Services CONTRACTOR(s) [Independent Inspection Agency (ies)] and Independent Testing Laboratories.

l. Any other applicable QA/QC activity (ies) for the PROJECT.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

21 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


4. Design Control

a. If the CONTRACTOR is responsible for any design activity, CONTRACTOR shall describe the design control program that will be applied on this PROJECT whether the design activity is to be done by the CONTRACTOR’s own personnel or by design consultants. All design input and output shall be reviewed prior to release to the next stage. Hold points shall be shown or indicated in the PROJECT Quality Plan. In addition to design review, design verification shall be conducted to ensure that the design stage output meets the design stage input requirements.

b. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all design computations, design

drawings and other design documents are properly controlled and checked prior to submission to the COMPANY. Design documents shall be signed by the person(s) who prepared and checked them. COMPANY reserves the right to return design documents without the proper signature of the responsible person(s).

c. If the CONTRACTOR subcontracts the design activity, a copy of the scope of WORK to be subcontracted shall be submitted to the COMPANY for review and approval.

5. Field Testing/Inspection and Construction/Installation Control CONTRACTOR shall establish and document all procedures and WORK

instructions to ensure that the construction and installation processes are performed in a controlled manner. The necessary qualification of personnel and procedure for activities such as welding, non-destructive examination, heat treatment, civil/concrete WORKS, etc. shall be defined. WORK instructions and procedures shall be adhered to by the CONTRACTOR’s personnel.

CONTRACTOR shall conduct inspection and testing activities at all phases

and quality audit at appropriate stages of the PROJECT construction/installation. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineers/inspectors shall develop and use field inspection checklist to facilitate checking of a process, activity, material or equipment. The field inspection checklist shall state the characteristic to be verified, inspection method, acceptance criteria and clause reference of the applicable standard or specification. The checklist shall have provision for writing the result of inspection, date of inspection and name and signature of the QA/QC engineer/inspector. Such activities where inspection checklists are required shall include but not necessarily limited to all pre-commissioning and commissioning checks and tests, material/equipment receiving inspection, concrete pre-pour inspection, asphalting, hydrostatic testing, pressure testing of equipment and lines and air balancing and leak testing of HVAC system. All inspection and testing results shall be reviewed, safely stored and maintained by the CONTRACTOR. Typical checklist shall be provided to the COMPANY for review and comment.

CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement the use of inspection logbook

for use by the CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineers/inspectors in recording


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

22 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


their comments and observations as a result of their inspection. CONTRACTOR’s personnel responsible for rectifying any observed deficiency or non-conformance shall also write their reply in the logbook stating the actions taken to correct the deficiency. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineers/inspectors shall ensure that all unsatisfactory observations on an item are cleared before any activity proceeds to the succeeding stage of that item.

C. Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan

1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY the Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan for each major material/equipment covered under the scope of this PROJECT; based on the following Transmission/Materials, which requires third party factory inspection:

• 380kV XLPE Cable • Cable Joints • Fiber Optic Cables • Cable Terminations • Link Boxes and SVL( if applicable) • DTS System • Grounding conductor XLPE/PVC Insulated Bare Grounding

conductors & Grounding Rods • Non-Metallic Fiber Optic Cable • Power and Control cable rating 1 kV (all types and sizes)

The quality activities including but not necessarily limited to inspection and testing, for the material/equipment shall be planned and documented in the form of a Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan. The Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan shall be submitted to the COMPANY together with the PROJECT Quality Plan/Quality Program.

2. The essential features of the required Quality Control Plan/Inspection and

Test Plan are as follows:

a. It is specifically identified to a particular material/equipment. b. It has provision for revisions to be made and is assigned a unique

document number. c. It lists all the inspection and testing activities sequentially. d. It states the location at which the activity is to be carried out. e. It identifies the applicable standard, test procedure to be followed and the

acceptance criteria for the inspection or test activity. f. It identifies the extent of inspection, sampling frequency and sample size,

or extent of check. g. It identifies the hold point, witness point and surveillance point. h. It identifies the record document to be generated, reviewed and retained.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

23 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


3. The Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan shall indicate the

scheduled dates of testing and inspection at the designated location.

4. Factory inspection & testing of major equipment/materials (i.e. 380kV Cables and terminations etc.) involved in the PROJECT, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange traveling requirements including economy class flight and accommodation for four (4) COMPANY Personnel for witnessing the field or laboratory testing. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule for factory inspection of major equipment/materials along with base design package for COMPANY review.

D. Manufacturers/Suppliers

1. CONTRACTOR shall procure all major material items for the PROJECT from COMPANY qualified and approved sources.

2. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that purchase orders to manufacturers/suppliers

contain all the applicable industry and COMPANY developed standards and specifications.

3. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that Purchase Order(s) to approved

manufacturers/ suppliers are not re-assigned or sub-contracted to other manufacturers/suppliers without COMPANY’s written consent.

E. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR(s)

[Independent Inspection Agency]

1. CONTRACTOR shall CONTRACT COMPANY approved Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR(s) to provide quality control/quality assurance monitoring of all quality activities related to procurement of materials and equipment to be used in this PROJECT.

2. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the contracted Quality Assurance and Quality

Control Services CONTRACTOR(s) to provide directly to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, by express mail or fax, four (4) copies of material status, quality surveillance reports, inspection and test reports within seven (7) days after the inspection. Soft copies of these signed reports in CD shall also be furnished and submitted for company records. All pages of the inspection and test reports shall be reviewed, signed and stamped by the approved inspector from the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR.

3. CONTRACTOR’s Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services

CONTRACTOR shall not re-assign or sublet portion of their contracted quality control/quality assurance monitoring WORK.

4. CONTRACTOR shall provide the COMPANY a copy of the Scope of WORK

issued to the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR. 5. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Services CONTRACTOR to verify and check each material/equipment for


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

24 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


conformance against the PROJECT Scope of WORK and Technical Specification and each clause of the applicable SEC Material Standard Specification (SMSS) and Transmission Material Standard Specification (TMSS) and report all deviations that are not included in the COMPANY issued clarifications. The report of the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR shall include the following:

a. PROJECT title, CONTRACT number. b. Complete description of the inspected material/equipment. c. Report number and date. d. Place and date of inspection, scope of inspection. e. Documents used during inspection. f. Manufacturer and plant location where the equipment was

manufactured. g. Detailed description of the inspection and testing activities and their

results, deviations to specification, manufacturer’s explanation to the deviations, visual inspection result, packing and marking inspection result, conclusion and copy of the outline drawing of the inspected material/equipment. Witnessed tests and reviewed test data shall be clearly identified in the inspection reports.

h. Name of the inspector(s).

6. CONTRACTOR shall furnish copies of the following document to the Quality

Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR(s) contracted to perform quality assurance and quality control monitoring of each material and equipment before surveillance:

a. Purchase Order placed to the manufacturer/supplier. b. Relevant section of PROJECT Scope of WORK and Technical

Specification. c. Applicable COMPANY developed standard and specification. d. Manufacturer’s Technical Specifications and COMPANY approved

design drawings. e. COMPANY’s approval of material/equipment and applicable

clarifications issued by the COMPANY. f. COMPANY approved test program, manufacturing quality control plan or

inspection and test plan.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

25 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


7. CONTRACTOR shall send to the COMPANY, copy (ies) of all technical correspondence exchanged between CONTRACTOR and “Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR”.

8. CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from COMPANY before allowing any

personnel of the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR to perform quality assurance and quality control monitoring activities related to procurement of materials to be used in this PROJECT. The specific material/equipment to be inspected, manufacturer and location of manufacturing plant shall be identified for each proposed inspector of the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR.

9. Employment by CONTRACTOR of a Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Services CONTRACTOR shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of any obligation set forth in this CONTRACT.

F. Release for Shipment Certificate

1. Release for Shipment Certificate is a certificate issued by the CONTRACTOR to the supplier/manufacturer to release the described material for shipment after recommendation by the Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services CONTRACTOR and approval by the COMPANY.

2. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all material requiring inspection and/or

quality surveillance at the supplier/manufacturer’s facility are not shipped to the WORK SITE without a “Release for Shipment Certificate.”

3. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that material shipped without approved

“Release for Shipment Certificate” is subject to rejection and return at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.

4. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all inspection and surveillance reports and

any other requirements are satisfactorily completed before requesting the COMPANY to approve the “Release for Shipment Certificate.”

G. Receipt Inspection

1. CONTRACTOR shall conduct receipt inspection of major material and equipment after delivery at the WORKSITE and shall submit a copy of the report to the COMPANY.

2. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report to the COMPANY any shipment and

transportation damage. H. Independent Testing Laboratory

1. CONTRACTOR shall contract COMPANY approved Independent Testing

Laboratory for material and field testing services. 2. CONTRACTOR shall instruct the contracted Independent Testing Laboratory

to provide four (4) copies of the test results and reports directly to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE within three (3) days of the test completion. Test reports


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

26 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


shall indicate the tested characteristics, test methods, acceptance criteria and applicable standard. The PROJECT Contract Number shall be used as reference on all reports.

3. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that contracted Independent Testing Laboratory

does not re-assign or sublet any portion of their contracted testing WORK. 4. CONTRACTOR shall provide the COMPANY a copy of the Scope of WORK

issued to and finalized with the Independent Testing Laboratory.

5. CONTRACTOR shall make reasonable effort to obtain timely access by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to the Independent Testing Laboratory’s facility, should the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE exercise the option to witness any or all the tests and verify the calibration status of the testing equipment.

6. Employment by CONTRACTOR of an Independent Testing Laboratory shall in

no way relieve CONTRACTOR of any obligation set forth in this CONTRACT. I. Inspection by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

1. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will conduct routine and/or periodic inspection of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities and access to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE to inspect the WORK and witness the tests.

2. CONTRACTOR shall advise the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in writing

the schedule of any field or laboratory testing to be conducted for this PROJECT showing the dates and location of testing.

3. CONTRACTOR shall attach a copy of the completed inspection checklist or

final/in-process inspection report by the CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineer/inspector on every inspection request submitted to the COMPANY. CONTRACTOR’s QA/QC engineer/inspector shall ensure that the items for inspection covered by the CONTRACTOR’s “Inspection Request” are ready and in accordance with the CONTRACT requirements prior to inspection by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

Inspection and witnessing of testing at site by COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE shall be within the regular working hours of the COMPANY. CONTRACTOR’s schedule for inspection and witnessing of testing at site by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE outside of the regular COMPANY working hours shall have prior approval from the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

27 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


J. COMPANY’s Quality Assessment (Audit) Right

1. COMPANY reserves the right to conduct scheduled and/or unscheduled

quality assessment of CONTRACTOR’s Quality System, PROJECT Operation, and PROJECT Quality Plan implementation. The results of such

assessments (audits) shall be confidential between the CONTRACTOR and

the COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall provide all access and assistance in a timely manner to

COMPANY personnel who will perform the quality assessment (audit). The CONTRACTOR shall implement corrective actions on all deficient areas

discovered during the quality assessment (audit) within a mutually agreeable time frame. All costs (except cost of wages, transportation and lodging of COMPANY Quality Assessors) incurred during the quality assessment (audit) shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

2. CONTRACTOR shall include the following conditions on purchase order

placed with the manufacturers/suppliers: “COMPANY reserves the right to perform plant survey, quality assessment

(audit), and quality surveillance activities and to inspect material at the suppliers/ manufacturer’s facility to verify compliance with the terms and conditions of the purchase order and its related documents. COMPANY reserves the right to witness any and all tests specified and to perform such visual examination (inspection) at the suppliers/manufacturer’s facility. COMPANY reserves the right to require certificates and data from the supplier/manufacturer on any pertinent aspect of the manufacturing process, including but not limited to, mill test reports, heat treatment certificates, welders and welding procedure qualification records, non-destructive examination records, test records and quality control manual that will form part of the non-material requirement that shall be shipped to COMPANY as a document package”.

K. Quality Control on CONTRACTOR’S Workmanship

Workmanship of the CONTRACTOR personnel in various tasks during the project shall be thoroughly monitored by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVES. Task skill and pattern of handling shall be the key points of this check. In case of poor performance is observed, COMPANY will stop the work immediately and take corrective measures in order to maintain the PROJECT’S quality.

L. Additional Requirements

The final COMPANY approved protection and control drawings with latest revision

numbers shall be the only drawings used by the independent inspection agency for testing and acceptance of protection and control equipment. The acceptance criteria shall include individual device testing and complete functional and point to point wiring check of the panels in conjunction with the composite AC and DC schematics and the rear view panel wiring diagrams. Each check shall refer to


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

28 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


specific drawing and revision number. This shall be implemented immediately after

base design meeting.

2.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY complete original sets of

Maintenance/Operations Manuals, consisting of, as a minimum, the following documents:

1. Detailed manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each equipment

installed. These manuals shall contain all information (including any special design and/or construction or operation feature), which may be required by the COMPANY for safe operation and maintenance of the new facilities and shall describe fully erection, commissioning, operation and maintenance procedures including mechanical/ electrical tolerances for maintenance/repair purposes.

2. Manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each particular test

apparatus. 3. Complete sets of exploded view drawings with comprehensive parts

identification for each device to enable the COMPANY to catalog and order. 4. Interconnection and Schematic Diagrams. 5. Setting and Calibration Procedures and Instructions.

B. The submission schedule for operation and maintenance manuals as detailed in (A)

above shall be as given below:

1. Six (6) sets for preliminary review by COMPANY as to adequacy, completeness and legibility, etc. at least eight (8) weeks before starting the commissioning tests.

2. Four (4) complete sets of fully revised manuals incorporating the

COMPANY’S comments to the full satisfaction of the COMPANY on technical completion.

3. One soft copy of all the above documents complied in CD.

C. The operation and maintenance manuals shall contain all information, which may be required by the COMPANY for safe operation and maintenance of the new facilities. Any special design and/or construction/operating features, basic operating procedures and philosophy shall also be included.

2.09 TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide technical data manuals for the underground cable

system installed under the scope of this PROJECT. B. The manuals binders shall have COMPANY logo, binder number and PROJECT title,

and CONTRACT Number on the front cover.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

29 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


2.10 TEST RECORD BOOK A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a "Test Record Book", which shall include the

following:

1. Factory test report of each particular equipment installed. 2. Field test report, which shall include the following:

a. Description of Equipment Tested and Manufacturer's Nameplate Data b. Description of Test c. List of Apparatus with Calibration Data d. Test Results e. Conclusions and Recommendations f. Appendix, including test forms

B. Each test form where applicable shall include a column quoting the acceptable maximum and minimum limits of the test in terms of voltage, current, frequency, time, etc. and include “As Found” and “As Left” values.

C. Four (4) copies of the "Test Record Book" are to be submitted within thirty (30) days

after completion of the PROJECT. 2.11 PLANT TAGGING OF EQUIPMENT AND INDEPENDENT COMPONENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall affix Plant Tag to each and every individual equipment

including independent components to be installed under this CONTRACT, which have a material value of Five Thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 5,000), or more. The CONTRACTOR shall install Plant Tags adjacent to the Manufacturer's Data Plate or at any other place approved by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. The CONTRACTOR shall affix Plant Tags by bolts and nuts, or rivets or welds, or adhesives, as instructed in writing by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, depending on the type of equipment to be tagged. The CONTRACTOR shall complete Plant Tagging before technical Completion.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY a list of all equipment and

independent components to be tagged, using the format of COMPANY Form No. 16511 (2/10) Exhibit I to the Job Specifications. Based on this list, COMPANY shall assign Plant Tag Number to each item and CONTRACTOR shall install the Plant Tags in accordance with this list. COMPANY will, within one (1) month from the date of receipt of the list, issue to CONTRACTOR the Plant Tags together with the list showing assigned Plant Tag Numbers.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required, assist the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE in

locating all equipment identified by Plant Tag Numbers in accordance with the list provided by the CONTRACTOR.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

30 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, before technical Completion, detailed lists of plant

tagging to COMPANY’S REPRESENTATIVE for use and reference. 2.12 CONTRACTOR/COMPANY’s CONSTRUCTION SITE OFFICE AND FACILITY A. The CONTRACTOR shall install a temporary site office prior to mobilization of any

construction activity pertaining to the PROJECT. Proposal with layout sketch of the site office shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval. If located outside the COMPANY compound, written permission of the owner of the land/premises shall be obtained and copy furnished to the COMPANY for records.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall supply and maintain a temporary site office

accommodation for COMPANY use including a conference room, prayer room and sanitary facilities, such as toilet and wash room. This site office shall be of very good condition. It shall be provided with air conditioning capable of maintaining 25°C room temperature. Necessary cleaning/janitorial services and drinking water facilities shall be provided.

Telephone, furniture, fire protection equipment, office equipment and supplies

including, but not limited to the following, should be available at Site Office: 1. Latest IBM compatible PC with Printers (2 numbers each), MS Office and MS

PROJECT installed. 2. Copying Machine - 1 3. Fax Machine - 1 4. Four (4) Drawer Filing Cabinets - 4 5. Desks - 4 6. Reference Tables - 2 7. Swivel Chairs - 4 8. Conference Table for eight (8) with chairs 9. Drawing File Racks - 2 10. Guest Chairs - 4 11. Presentation Blackboard - 1 12. Log Books and Office Stationery 13. Portable Fire Extinguishers, Type ABC, 30 lbs. - 2 14. First-aid Cabinet - 1 C. Electricity Connection/Electrical Wiring The CONTRACTOR shall provide his own generators to meet construction, testing

and commissioning power requirements. However, if power supply point is available near the PROJECT site, then a temporary metered electricity connection on chargeable basis will be provided by the COMPANY to the site office by Operating Area at the request of the CONTRACTOR.

The temporary electrical wiring and installation for the site office is to be performed

in accordance with the requirements of the latest revision of the National Electrical Code (NEC) or the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

31 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


D. Telephone Connection The CONTRACTOR shall avail a temporary telecommunication facility at the site

office. The COMPANY may, at its discretion, allow the CONTRACTOR to have temporary extension of telephone connection, if possible, from the existing telecommunication facility on remittance of telephone rental charges as per COMPANY regulations. Telephone sets and associated cabling shall be installed by the CONTRACTOR.

The CONTRACTOR will be allowed to use the telephone only for making local calls. E. Water Supply Connection For site office requirement and construction purpose, the CONTRACTOR shall

arrange adequate water supply from Municipality. If no Municipal water supply extension is available, a water tank of adequate capacity shall be installed for site requirement during construction stage.

F. Drainage Connection A temporary drainage connection from existing system shall be provided to the site

office. Alternate arrangement as per standards shall be provided if drainage facility does not exist.

G. Quality of Temporary WORK Temporary WORK shall conform to applicable COMPANY Standards and/or the

requirement of concerned outside agencies and shall be removed from the premises upon completion of the WORK, unless specifically mentioned otherwise.

H. Housekeeping and Cleanliness The CONTRACTOR shall bestow special attention in housekeeping and

cleanliness. All rubbish and waste shall be removed at regular intervals from the site on daily basis. During construction, all nearby equipments shall be secured by the CONTRACTOR to prevent the intrusion of the dust into these equipments.

I. Demobilization After obtaining the demobilization approval from the COMPANY, the

CONTRACTOR shall arrange to remove all temporary facilities and submit clearance certificates from the concerned authorities on completion of the PROJECT or fifteen (15) days after removal of the temporary facilities whichever is later.

2.13 LOSS PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS The CONTRACTOR and/or CONTRACTOR’s SUBCONTRACTOR(s) shall strictly

comply with the following Loss Prevention requirements, in addition to the stipulations in Schedule A - General Terms and Conditions of CONTRACT:


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

32 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


A. General Requirements

1. Strict adherence to all applicable provisions of the COMPANY Accident Prevention Manual and Construction Safety Manual (ISD Special Manual No. 6.483).

2. Compliance with the provisions of the COMPANY General Instructions on

WORK Permit and Clearance Procedure (G.I. “65.111”). The CONTRACTOR shall have an authorized employee with certificate to receive WORK Permit. If the CONTRACTOR has no authorized employee, or has an employee with expired certificate, he shall be responsible to coordinate with the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for scheduling of WORK Permit training course. All activities of the CONTRACTOR near or inside the substation shall be allowed only after securing WORK Permit.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit his Loss Prevention Program to the

COMPANY sufficiently in advance to obtain COMPANY approval prior to commencement of WORK at site. The Loss Prevention Programs shall contain the following:

a. Cover Page complete with references, as follows:

- CONTRACTOR’s Name - Title of Submittal - PROJECT Title and Location - CONTRACT Number - COMPANY’s Name - Date of revision

b. Table of Contents c. CONTRACTOR’s COMPANY Safety Policy Statement complete with

signature over printed name and title of CONTRACTOR’s Management REPRESENTATIVE.

d. Specific program items (suitable for the SOW) that the CONTRACTOR

proposes to implement during the CONTRACT execution. e. Attachments necessary to supplement the program.

- PROJECT Table of Organization - Construction Schedule - Equipment Schedule - Manpower Schedule - CONTRACTOR’s standard forms for safety related reports. - Temporary Facilities Layout Plan showing the distribution, type and

capacity of portable fire extinguishers - Temporary Facilities Location Plan - Copy of valid certificate of first aid


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

33 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary personal protective clothing (i.e. head, eye, face, hand, and foot protection) and respiratory protective equipment including personal protective equipment for fall protection such as safety belts and lifelines, and implement wearing them.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and use adequate and suitable

safety/warning signs, cordon tapes, portable barricades, warning lights and personnel protective equipment at the JOB SITE to protect the safety of COMPANY and CONTRACTOR personnel and the public, and to prevent damage to property.

6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide first aid facilities and must have a certified

employee to administer first aid and Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR). 7. The CONTRACTOR shall refrain from using mechanized excavation

equipment within restricted areas unless cleared and permitted to do so. 8. The CONTRACTOR shall request in advance a clearance for de-energizing

the interfacing points and observe grounding procedures. 9. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the COMPANY, ID cards for his

employees and stickers for his vehicles/equipment prior to mobilization to site. 10. In order to prevent theft/loss of materials/equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall

take the necessary measures and precautions including but not limited to the following:

a. All materials provided or used in this CONTRACT shall be stored by the

CONTRACTOR in safe and secured locations even if stored for short period of time.

b. If the equipment/materials are to be stored in the substation area for a prolonged period, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that they are kept in locked containers or any other appropriate method of storage such that the materials/equipment are not easily noticeable by people with intention of theft or pilferage. Moreover, such containers shall be placed at a distance from the fence/boundary wall.

c. The CONTRACTOR shall also consider other factors (i.e. temperature,

humidity) affecting the storage of the materials/equipment being stored in containers, to avoid any damage during such storage period.

B. PROJECT Involving Elevated WORKS

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit his heavy equipment (i.e. cranes and bucket trucks) to the COMPANY for safety inspection and certification and correspondingly stick with green safety sticker.

2. The CONTRACTOR’s ladders shall conform to OSHA (Occupational Safety

and Health Administration) standard. Safety practices shall be followed in positioning ladders. Scaffolds shall be designed, built and inspected by a competent engineer prior to its use.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

34 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


C. PROJECT Involving Welding and Cutting Operations

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable fire extinguishers to be used in case of fire emergencies.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the welding gas cylinders with suitable rack

that is equipped with security chain(s).

D. PROJECT near Energized Lines or Equipment Observe working clearances when working near or about energized line or

equipment as per COMPANY’s Accident Prevention Manual. E. PROJECT Requiring the Use of Chemical(s) Submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) of chemicals required or which are to be

used in the execution of the PROJECT.

2.14 OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS

The successful bidder/CONTRACTOR shall submit itemized prices and complete technical data/ brochures for the spare parts included in the list per Appendix-V.

These shall be in accordance with the requirements as listed in the pricing

attachment 'VI' to SCHEDULE "C" of this contract. 2.15 SHUTDOWN/ OUTAGE COORDINATION Planned outages of existing equipment, which are required for CONTRACTOR’s

installation of new equipment or movement/relocation of existing equipment, shall be minimized by CONTRACTOR during his PROJECT execution.

Where outages of existing equipment cannot be avoided, CONTRACTOR shall

coordinate all details of planned outages through the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE with initial coordination occurring during the base design stage of the PROJECT.

As part of the CONTRACTOR’s coordination activity (for the planned outage),

CONTRACTOR shall provide reasons, plans and detailed schedule for the planned outages that will be subjected to COMPANY’s review and approval.

COMPANY’s approval of planned outages shall be based solely on COMPANY’s

operational considerations. CONTRACTOR shall note that, as a minimum requirement, COMPANY will

consider approval of CONTRACTOR’s proposed planned outages during low load periods (beginning of November to start of April), and when CONTRACTOR shall provide enough manpower at the outage site(s) to minimize the planned outage time.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

35 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


No unplanned outages/disruptions of COMPANY’s equipment or systems shall be allowed to support the CONTRACTOR’s installation of any new equipment, or CONTRACTOR’s movement/relocation of existing equipment at any site.

**** END OF SECTION II ****


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

36 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION III - SCOPE OF WORK 3.01 GENERAL A. This PROJECT shall be carried out on Lump Sum Turnkey basis. The

CONTRACTOR shall design, manufacture/procure, supply and deliver all equipment and materials, construction, commissioning, SITE testing and provide other related services for the completion of this PROJECT in accordance with the requirements of this Scope of WORK and Technical Specifications.

B. The WORK shall include, but not limited to, the following:

1. All design and engineering services.

2. Procurement and filling of all the Cable Pipes with Bentonite.

3. Extra length of cable shall be provided in shape of snacking, at both ends of straight through joints and cable termination ends for future re-jointing.

4. Inspection, testing & commissioning of all constructed and installed equipment, and their allied facilities.

5. The whole specified cable route shall be thoroughly investigated and surveyed. Any utilities/cables found along the route, which provide hindrance to the construction of cable tunnels/ducts, shall be reflected in the design drawings & relocated (if required). If such relocation is not possible then an alternate route shall be proposed & submitted to SEC for approval.

7. Contractor shall submit to SEC final feasible drawings for 380kV cable tunnel

route & Fiber optic/control cables ducts route for approval.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall handover all dismantled materials/equipment if any to COMPANY designated warehouse.

D. Contractor shall coordinate with SEC/Other Contractors (if any) for relocation of the

existing facilities/cables as required.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

37 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK

380kV CABLES FROM GT Generation Transformers of Steam Turbines) AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO 380kV GIS AT QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION

The WORK shall include, but not limited to, the following:

A. Complete design, supply and installation of Three (3) 380kV, U/G Cable

circuits consisting of one run of 1/C-1000mm2, Copper conductor, Super clean-XLPE Cable per phase, complete with all required cable terminations, splice kits and all other accessories between GT AT Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION, as per 380kV cable route plan drawing # CT-906045 Approximate route length of each circuit are as below

1. Steam Turbine #1 To S/S 9032 : 600M 2. Steam Turbine #02 To S/S 9032: 330M 3. Steam Turbine #03 To S/S 9032: 1000M

B. Complete design, supply and installation Fiber Optic, Multicore/ LV / Control

Cables, As per respective Appendices, along with the Cable Circuits, complete with all required accessories between GT at Qassim Power Plant (Transmission room) and GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION

C. Eighteen (18) nos. 380kV Cable Sealing Ends, Nine (9) nos.SF6/XLPE at new

Qassim-4 (9032) and Nine (9) nos. Oil Immersed type at GT of Qassim power Plant, complete with cable termination kits, SF6/XLPE, XLPE/Oil interfaces and all other accessories.

D. Lot: Suitable Link Boxes in underground pits and Sheath Voltage limiters

as per Design calculations.

Note: The 380kV Cable Sheaths shall be fully cross bonded. The 380kV cables shall be checked for bonding configuration adequacy and sheath voltage limiter, which shall be provided. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish calculations for COMPANY review/approval.

E. Lot: Grounding interconnections including supply of all grounding materials and provide grounding as per TES-P-104.08, Rev.01.

F. Six (6) channel Distributed Temperature Sensing System complete with Digital Controller based Control Panel, Sensors, Fiber optic cable (4 fiber) per phase monitoring, Heat Tracing cables and all other accessories for a complete system. DTS shall have self checking facility for the system. Spare contacts shall be provided for LD i.e. supplies system fiber failure. One printer shall be provided along with DTS system. The DTS system shall be integrated with SAS.

G. Testing & commissioning of DTS System including Optic fiber DTS cable and documentation of the results.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

38 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


H. Testing and commissioning of proposed underground power cables end-to- end between GT at Qassim Power Plant & GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV

SUBSTATION and documentation of the results. All required WORK, materials, tools and accessories to perform this testing and commissioning shall be provided and performed by the CONTRACTOR.

I. Gassing and degassing of related 380kV GIS cable compartments at Qassim-

4 (9032) SUBSTATION and documentation for the above mentioned work. Gassing & degassing work including Electrical Tests is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility but it should be carried out by the GIS manufacturer or as approved by SEC.

J. Testing & commissioning of Optic fiber cables for protection and documentation

of the results, as per APPENDIX-VII.

3.03 CIVIL WORK

For Civil and Structural works, refer to Appendix-VIII.

3.04. INDUSTRIAL SECURITY AND FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Detection / Alarm System

1. Provide and install complete fire detection/alarm systems as per SEC specification TES-B-106-01 Rev.0 at cable tunnels that shall include the following major equipment/devices:

a. Fire Protective Signaling Panel (FPSP) located at Control Room b. Mimic panel located at Control Building c. Annunciation Panel at Guard House (if Applicable) d. Automatic Fire Detectors e. Manual Alarm Stations f. Audible and Visual Alarm Devices g. Data Printer to be located at Control Building h. Fire Fighting Equipment.

2. Annunciation/ alarm & clean agent gas discharge shall be transmitted to SAS & LDC. Detailed proposal shall be submitted for SEC review and Approval.

B. Fire Protection System

1. All Cable Tunnels shall be provided with complete Fixed Installation Total Flooding Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System to comply with the requirements of TES-B-106.05 or TES-B-106.06. It shall also comply with NFPA 2001 (2012 Edition).

2. Power cable shall be made flame retardant inside the substation which may be achieved by painting. The supply of


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

39 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


paint shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR/ Manufacturer.

3. The fire protection system shall be integrated with SAS. 4. Refer to TES-B-106.05 or TES-B-106.06 for specification for

Fixed Installation Total Flooding Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System.

5. All fire fighting equipment to be provided shall be UL listed and/or Factory Mutual (FM) approved. Fire fighting system to be provided shall fully comply with all requirements of relevant NFPA codes and standards.

6. Each area protected with clean agent system shall have independent conventional control panel complete with conventional detectors. The control panel shall have provision for automatic and manual mode to be located in close proximity to the area being protected.

7. Each door leading to the protected areas (exit or entrance) shall have clean agent system indicators located outside of the protected area next to the door.

8. Visual & audible alarm shall be provided inside and outside the protected areas.

9. Cable penetration fire stops shall be provided in accordance with the requirements outlined in TES-P-119.21.

10. The minimum clean agent design concentration to be used in design shall be based on NFPA 2001, 2012 Edition. No elevation correction shall be applied.

11. The cable tunnels shall be provided with partition & door at every 60 meters interval.

12. Maximum capacity of clean agent cylinder shall not exceed 750 pounds.

13. Clean agent cylinders located inside the protected area shall be provided with manual-mechanical / manual-pneumatic actuator beside the door of the entrance to the protected spaces.

14. Cylinders for cable tunnels shall be located in an unobstruced and accessible area when installed inside the cable tunnel, otherwise an independent and air-conditioned cylinder room shall be provided above the tunnel.

15. Fire Extinguishers shall be provided and installed in accordance with the requirements of 90-TMSS-03 and TES-P-119.21.

3.05 MECHANICAL WORKS

The WORK shall include supply of equipment, materials, labor and tools for the installation of new systems. The WORK shall also include equipment start-up, testing and commissioning for the new systems and to execute other related services for the safe, efficient and reliable performance and complete installation of this PROJECT to the satisfaction of the COMPANY in conformance with the requirements as prescribed below.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

40 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


Cable Tunnels

1. Ventilation system shall be provided for the cable tunnels. 2. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Ventilation System. 3. Drainage System. 4. Smoke purging/ventilating fans shall be provided in

accordance with the requirements for cable basement in TES-P-119.19.

3.06 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENTS, CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit all design documents, calculations, studies

and drawings at various stages of the PROJECT as per Table 3.01, as a minimum.

Table 3.01

DOCUMENT TYPE IN

DEX

DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION BID

STAGE

BASE DESIGN STAGE

DETAIL &

CONSTRUCTION STAGE

AS-BUILT

STAGE

EQU

IPM

ENT

AN

D M

ATE

RIA

LS

P XLPE Power Cables X X X X P XLPE Cable Terminations and

Splice Kits X X X X

P Grounding Cables and Grounding Rods X X X X

P Bonding Leads & Sheath Sectionalizing Insulators X X X X

P Sheath Voltage Limiter (SVL) X X X X P Link Box along with its

accessories X X X X

P Power Cable Clamps X X X X Fire Alarm System Equipment X

T U/G Non Metallic Fiber Optic Cable (U/G NFOC) X X X X

T NMFOC Accessories X X X X T Optical Fiber Joint Boxes X X X X Link Box Foundation X X X Cable Supports X X X Cable Warning Tapes X X X Cable Protective Tiles X X X Steel Wire Mesh X X X Cable warning post X X X Duct Sealing Units X X X PVC Conduits and Fittings X X X HDPE/Corrugated Sub ducts X X X HVAC Equipment X X Fire Protection Equipment X X Plumbing Equipment X X X X Concrete X X X Asphalt Concrete Pavement X X X Reinforcing Steel X X X Backfill Materials X X X Water Leakage Sealant for Cable

Ducts & Fire Proofing Material to Protect the Cables in Cable Basement

X X X

REP

OR

TS,

PRO

CED

UR

ES,

PRO

P A Description of the Project X X X A Scope of Work X X X A Design Basis and Data X X X


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

41 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


A Maintenance Aspects X X X A Major Materials Purchase

Requisitions (Preliminary) X X X

A Soil Thermal Resistivity Measurements Report along cables route

X X X

A Type Test Reports for Major Equipment/Materials X X X

P Detailed Cable Ampacity Calculations X X X

P Electrical Interference Study in case the power cable parallel to communication circuits

X X X

P Calculations of Power Cables Sequence Impedances X X X

P Calculations for Cable Metallic Sheath Sizing and Fault current withstand capability

X X X

P Calculations for Sheath Induced Voltage under normal & fault conditions and the Selection of Sheath Voltage Limiters (SVL)

X X X

P Detailed explanation for adopting the major/minor sections arrangement for cross bonding scheme

X X X

P Cable pulling tension and sidewall pressure calculations X X X

P Structural Design calculations for duct banks on road crossings X X X

CONTROL SHEET

X Drawing Control Sheet X X X X Revision of Existing Drawing

Control Sheets X X X

DES

IGN

DR

AW

ING

S

A/P

Plot Plan - Power cables Routing Plan

X X X

A/P Plan & profile details - Showing the cables circuits with necessary sections, Elevations and Details, utilities, spacing (splicing) points, location of link Boxes for cable sheath grounding and communication Hand holes.

X X X

A List of Materials X X X A SITE Layout X X X P Abbreviations, Symbols and Legend X X X P Underground power cables System

One Line Diagram X X X

P Relaying and Metering - System One Line Diagram X X X

P Cable Arrangement and Details in <<Substation basements & Tunnles/Troughs>>

X X X

P Cable Metallic Sheath Grounding (Bonding) Arrangement and Details X X X

P Link Box Locations Plan, Section and Details X X X

P Revised Existing COMPANY Drawings to reflect the newly completed PROJECT

X X X


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

42 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


P Power Cables Termination Arrangement, Termination Plan, Sections/Details and Splicing Details

X X X

P Interface diagrams of Power cables at <<Source Substation and Destination Substation>>.

X X X

P/T Underground power and Fiber Optic Cables Routing Plan and profile, Sections and Details

X X X

T Fiber Optic Cable Interconnection Diagram X X X

T Key Plan - Fiber Optic Cable X X X T Fiber Optic Cable Route/Layout

Inside <<Three Substations>> X X X

T Fiber Optic Cable Pulling Plan and Calculations Details X X X

T Mandrel Test Plan Details X X X T Communication Hand hole Plan X X X T Communication Hand hole fold outs

and details X X X

T Overall FOC cable layout X X X T U/G NMFOC Route plan X X X T Fiber Optic Cable Splicing details X X X M Power Cables Support and

Calculation of Cable Clamp Spacing

X X X

Q/R Duct bank Details X X X Q/R Steel Bending Details X X X Q/R Link Box Foundation Details X X X Q/R Hand hole Details X X X Q/R Details of Trenches & Duct banks X X X

TEST

PLA

N, S

CH

EDU

LE,

PRO

CED

UR

ES E

TC.

A PROJECT PERT/CPM Schedule for Monitoring and Control Activities X X X

A CONTRACTOR’S Loss Prevention Program X X X

A Site Security Plan X X X A QA/QC Plan X X X A Inspection, Test Plan and Factory

Test Procedure for Materials X X X

A Site Pre-commissioning & Commissioning Plan X X X

A Site Work Test Procedure X X X A Job Safety Plan - CONTRACTOR’S

Loss Prevention Program X X X

A SITE Security Plan X X X A Preliminary Outage Schedule and

Plan X X X

A Final Outage Schedule and Plan X X X X - Indicates requirement for submission.

The requirements indicated under column “Detail & Construction Stage” shall be submitted as indicated against each item. The time schedule for the submittal of each

group shall be finalized during base design. Partial submittal of calculations/drawings

in any group will not be accepted.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

43 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


Notes to the Above Table:

1. Bid Stage

a. The following shall be provided for each indicated item in the table:

- Data Schedules completely filled-up, signed, dated and stamped by both the Manufacturer and Contractor

- Equipment catalogues makes, type and technical parameters duly highlighted

- Certified Type (Design) Test report of all major equipment - Clause by clause compliance statement of the COMPANY’S

Material Standards Specification duly signed, dated stamped and dated by both the Manufacturer and Contractor

- List of past supplies - Vendor drawings

b. The following shall also be provided:

- Compliance statement for the scope of WORK duly signed, dated

and stamped by Contractor - List of deviations, if any duly signed, dated and stamped by both

the Manufacturer and Contractor

2. Base Design Stage

Final approval of major equipment (indicated under bid stage, Table 3.01), after all deviations have been resolved, shall be obtained. The following shall be provided for each indicated item in the table:

a. Design calculations b. Original manufacturer’s drawings and literatures c. Design drawings d. Final data schedules duly signed, stamped and dated by both

equipment/ manufacturers and CONTRACTOR e. Final clause-by-clause compliance statement duly signed, stamped

and dated by both equipment/material manufacturers and CONTRACTOR

f. Vendor drawings g. Computer Software used for Current Rating & Sheath Induced

Voltage Calculations shall be provided along with two (2) Dongle Keys to EHV-E & DD at the time of submission of Current Rating & Sheath Induced Voltage Calculations and training two (2) EHV-E & DD Engineers for the supplied Software

3. Final Design and Construction Drawings Stage

a. Final Design Drawings

- Final design drawings shall be provided for each indicated item in

the table. - Final design calculation for the PROJECT and additional

calculations, if required.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

44 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


- Final approval of design drawings, after incorporating all comments of COMPANY, shall be obtained.

- Vendor drawings b. Construction Drawings

- Final construction drawings shall be provided for each indicated

item in the table. - Revised final construction drawings shall be provided, if required.

4. As-Built Stage

a. As-built drawings shall be provided for each indicated item in the table.

b. The As-built drawings for Power and Fiber Optic Cable Routes

shall include Cable and Joints locations using Global Positioning System (GPS) on following scales:

Key Plan: 1:10000/1:20000 depending on the Route-Length or as

directed by the SEC. Detailed Drawings: 1:300/1:1000 depending on the Route-Length or as

directed by the SEC. Along with the final detail design package, CONTRACTOR shall submit

the following in Abode Portable Document Format (PDF) files. Packages shall be put such that each discipline documents are arranged in a separate folder. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the same in a CD.

a. Design Drawings

b. Design Calculations c. Material Data Schedules d. Equipment Catalogue

The revision numbers and revision notes shall be retained in the submitted final detail design drawings. Both of input and output files for design calculations carried out by computer programs shall be furnished.

All PDF files shall have no open or change security password.

3.07 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS The CONTRACTOR shall also carry out the following WORK: B. The CONTRACTOR shall satisfy all the conditions listed in the approvals for the PERMIT/APPROVAL from all concerned authority (if required) of utilities in the proposed routes and coordinate all WORK activities with the respective

agencies. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with all the above mentioned m agencies and correspondences regarding permit / approval.

E. Reinstatement of existing facilities such as asphalt, curb stone, median, plant, Landscape, etc., shall be reinstated to the satisfaction of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and agencies/authorities involved.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

45 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


F. Excavation and, if necessary, Dewatering, shuttering of the Cable Trenches as Well as the preparation of the Cable Ducts and Supporting Structures for the Installation of the Cables. 3.08. PROJECT INTERFACE

The following summarizes the interface jobs/activities between Contractors/Client at Qassim Power Plant and at Qassim-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION and 380kV Underground Cable Contractors. These Jobs/activities shall be coordinated through the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

AT Qassim power plant & Qassim-4 Substation (9032)

Sr. # ACTIVITY

[Include design, supply of material, erection, testing & commissioning]

Power Plant

Contractor

Cable Contrac

tor

S/S

Contractor

Remarks

1

Construction of respective Tunnels as per Approved cable Route drawing between Qassim power Plant & Qassim-4 380KV S/S (9032) for 380KV cables

C

X

C

2

Construction of respective cable duct bank/HH /steel pipes, as per Contractor Approved Route Drawing between Qassim power Plant & Qassim-4 380KV S/S (9032) for laying optic fiber and Control/instrumentation/Multicore/ LV cables.

C

X

C

3

Provision of all required cable supports/trays/ladders/clamps and Grounding Interconnection at GT, inside cable tunnels & GIS hall, for laying 380kV Power cables and DTS cables.

C

X

C

4

Laying of 380kV power cables between GT at Qassim power Plant & 380kV GIS cable compartments at Qassim-4 S/S (9032), including link boxes & SVLs and complete DTS system.

C

X

C

5

Termination, testing & commissioning of 380kV power cables including complete DTS system

C

X

C

6

Gassing/degassing of 380kV GIS cable compartments at Qassim-4 (9032) S/S for termination of 380KV power cables

C

X

C

Gassing/degassing to be carried out by GIS


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

46 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


manufacturer

7 Optic Fiber Cables between Qassim power Plant & Qassim-4 380KV S/S (9032) for 380KV cables ( between splitter boxes in telecom rooms at both ends), including all steel/PVC pipes, hardware etc.

C

X

C

8

Splicing/termination of OFC at splitter boxes in telecom rooms of both ends, including pig-tail connections.

C

X

C

9

End to End testing & commissioning of OFC & telecom equipment

X

X

X

10 Labels of circuits at 380kV GIS & Cable Entries point.

C X C

11

Labels of Opticle Fibre Cable at requied places.

C

X

C

12

Collection of Subsatation Layout from S/S Contractor/ Client and submission of 380 KV, DTS and Optic Fibre Cables arrangement (Plan & Section) inside the Substation for Company review & approval.

C

X

C

13

Misc. Items , whether mentioned or not, required for the successful completion, Testing and Operation of all works.

X C

X C

X C

3.09 STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS All WORKS equipment and material covered by this document shall conform to the

latest edition of the COMPANY’S Material Standard Specifications supplemented with latest applicable industry Standards, Codes and Specifications. The latest edition of each Standard and Specification shall mean the latest edition specified hereunder.

The CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with the following Standards, Codes and

Specifications, and no deviation shall be accepted unless otherwise accepted by a written waiver from COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR may propose "equivalent" Standards and Specifications if such standards and specifications are equal to or better than those specified herein, and shall be subject to prior approval of the COMPANY.

For additional standards relating to communications system installation and supply of

communications materials, refer to Appendix VI.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

47 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


NOTE: All Materials/Equipments, to be used for this Project, shall be of National Grid SA

prequalified Manufacturers and from approved make and Type only A. COMPANY Materials Standard Specifications 01-TMSS-01 General Requirements for All Equipment/Materials (Rev. 01) 10-TMSS-01 Conductors Bare. (Rev. 01) 10-TMSS-05 Bare, Copper-Clad Steel Grounding Conductor and Ground Rod (Rev. 01) 11-SDMS-03 XLPE insulated Power cable for rated voltage from 15 to 36kV

(Rev. 01) 11-TMSS-02 Power cable, XLPE insulated, copper conductor, single core Rev-01 110kV, 115kV, 132kV, 230kV or 380kV 11-TMSS-10 Power and/or Control Cable, Cu. or Al. Conductor, 600/1000V (Rev. 01) Rating

11-TMSS-11 Instrumentation Cables, Shielded (Rev. 0) 12-SDMS-01 Cables joints, termination and accessaries up to 36kV (Rev.01) 12-TMSS-10 Splice and Termination Kits for Power Cables, (Rev.0) Rated 69kV, 110kV, 115kV, 132kV, 230kV and 380kV

12-TMSS-11 Link Boxes for Grounding of U/G Power Cables (Rev. 0) 23-TMSS-01 PVC Conduits and Fittings for Underground cables (Rev. 0) 23-TMSS-02 Duct Sealing Unit (Rev. 0) 23-TMSS-04 Cable Clamps for Power Cables (Rev. 0) 24-TMSS-01 Metallic Cable Tray Systems (Rev. 01) 31-TMSS-01 Relay and Control Panels (Rev. 0)


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

48 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


31-TMSS-02 Auxiliary AC/DC Panels (Rev. 0) 31-TMSS-06 Terminal Blocks (Rev. 0) 37-TMSS-03 LV Circuit breakers (Rev. 0) 50-TMSS-01 Current Transformers, 11kV through 380kV (Rev. 0) 50-TMSS-03 Potential Transformers, 33kV through 380kV (Rev. 0) 70-TMSS-03 Normal Weight Ready-Mixed Portland Cement Concrete (Rev. 01) 73-TMSS-05 Centrifugal exhaust Fans (Rev.0) 75-TMSS-01 Plastic Piping for Plumbing system (Rev.0) 78-TMSS-06 Paints: Aluminium And Steel (Rev. 0) 83-TMSS-01 submersible sump pump (Rev.0) 90-TMSS-01 Fire Protective Signaling Panels (Rev. 0) 90-TMSS- 03 Portable Fire Extinguishers (Rev. 0) B. COMPANY Engineering Standards

TES-B-106.01 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems (Rev. 0) TES-B-106.05 HFC-227 ea Clean Agent Extinguishing System (Rev. 0) TES-B-106.06 FK 5-1-12 Fixed installation Total Flooding Clean-Agent Fire (Rev. 0) Extinguishing System


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

49 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


TES-H-107.01 Painting Standards (Rev. 0)

TES-H-107.02 Paint Color Codes and Standards (Rev. 0)

TES-P-104.01 General Engineering Requirements for U/G Cables (Rev. 01)

TES-P-104.02 Cable Construction (Rev. 01) TES-P-104.03 Cable sizing and selection (Rev. 01) TES-P-104.04 Splice & Terminations (Rev. 01) TES-P-104.05 Cable Installations, Engineering Requirements (Rev. 01)

TES-P-104.08 Bonding & Grounding of Insulated Metallic Sheath of Power (Rev. 1) Cable System

TES-P-119.01 Introduction to Substation Design Standards (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.02 Basic Design Aspects (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.08 Clearances (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.10 Grounding (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.12 Application Criteria for Electrical Equipment (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.19 Substation building And Site Development (Rev. 01) TES-P-119.20 LV Cable Raceways and Cable installation practices (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.21 Fire & Loss Prevention Requirements (Rev.0) TES-P-119.29 LV Cable Selection and Sizing (600V & Below) (Rev. 0)


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

50 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


TES-P-119.30 Auxiliary Power Systems (AC/DC) (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.33 Substation Electrical Diagrams (Rev. 0) TES-P-119.34 Application of System Grounding (Rev. 0) C. COMPANY Construction Standards

TCS-K-100.01 HVAC Systems and Equipment Installation (Rev.0)

TCS-P-104.01 General Requirements for Underground Power Cables System (Rev.0) TCS-P-104.02 Cable Reels Handling & Storage (Rev.0) TCS-P-104.03 Trenches and Ducts (Rev.0) TCS-P-104.06 Cable Installation, Field Handling Procedures (Rev.0) ` TCS-P-104.08 Field Testing of Power Cables 110kV,115kV,132kV,230kV and (Rev.0) 380kV TCS-P-105.00 Pre-Commissioning Tests/procedures for SEC transmission (Rev. 01) transmission installation

TCS-Q-113.01 Asphalt Concrete Paving

(Rev. 0) TCS-Q-113.02 Earthworks (Rev. 01) TCS-Q-113.03 Cast-In-Place Concrete (Rev. 01) TCS-Q-113.04 Precast Concrete works (Rev. 0)

TCS-P-122-02 Material Handling

(Rev. 0) TCS-P-122.03 Structure Staking

(Rev.0) TCS-P-122.05 Installation of Steel Structure Foundations

(Rev. 0)


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

51 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


TCS-P-122.06 Steel Structures Assembly and Erection

(Rev. 0) TCS-T-111.02 Conduit Sealing For Underground Communication Cable

(Rev.0)

D. COMPANY Standard Drawings

SA-421111 Plumbing Miscellaneous Details

TD-800007 Standard Sign Danger High Voltage Keep Away (Rev. 0) TA-800063 Highway Crossing for 69kV to 380kV Cables (Rev. 0)

TA-800106 Fire Protection-Miscellaneous details (Rev. 0) TA-800012 Pre-cast Concrete panel Boundary Wall (Plan,Elevation and (Rev.0) Details) TA-800062 Typical Duct Bank Sections Concrete Encased Duct Bank for 69 Rev.0 kV to 380kV TA-800096 Service Manholes type -1 (1.20mX1.5mX1.85m) Details and (Rev. 0) ReInforcement

TA-800097 Service Manholes type -2 (1.50mX2.75mX2.00m) Details and (Rev. 0) ReInforcement TA-800106 Fire Protection Miscellaneous Details (Rev. 0)

TA-800133 Removeable Crash barrier Location Plan and detail in substation (Rev. 0)

TB-800079 PVC Conduit Installation Concrete Encased (Vital Communication)

(Rev. 0)

SC-036128 Anchor Bolt Details of Standard Anchor (Rev. 0)

TE-800110 COMPANY Monogram for Equipment Mounting (Rev. 0) TD-800008 Standard Sign, Danger High Voltage, Bone & Skull (Rev. 0)


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

52 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


3.10 SPECIFIC COMMUNICATION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS For Communication Standard and Specification refer to Appendix-VI *** END OF SECTION III ***


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

53 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION IV - ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA AND REQUIREMENTS The CONTRACTOR shall adopt the following design criteria and requirements for the PROJECT as a minimum: 4.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS All equipment devices furnished under this PROJECT shall be suitable for operation

under the SITE conditions outlined in the COMPANY General Specification 01-TMSS-01, Rev.01 “General Requirements for All Equipment/Materials.”

Soil Thermal Resistivity The soil thermal resistivity is largely dependent on density and water content of the

relevant type of soil. Therefore, the actual thermal resistivity of the soil along the whole power cable route shall be measured prior to the design and all test results shall be included in the base design package. Actual soil thermal resistivity values shall be used to calculate cable Ampacities.

4.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. General The 380kV underground design parameters shall be in accordance with the

requirements outlined in COMPANY General Specification 01-TMSS-01, Rev.01, “General Requirements for All Equipment/Materials.”

B. System Short Circuit Level COMPANY’S 380kV system is effectively grounded. The short circuit rating of the

380kV system of the source Substation and the new Substation shall be considered as follows:

1. The short circuit rating of the 380kV Switchgear is 63kA (1 second).

The 380kV cable design shall be based on the 380kV system short circuits rating at 63 kA for 1sec. C. System Phasing Arrangement The Cable Contractor shall coordinate with Substation and Power Plant Contractors

for correct Phasing at both ends.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

54 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


4.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The following design requirements shall be considered by the CONTRACTOR. A. Calculation of Cable Ampacity

1. Cable Ampacity shall be supported by detailed calculations as per IEC 60287 1-1, 1-2 & 1-3 to assure the availability of the required cable Ampacity for actual cable installations and SITE conditions, particularly at worst points.

2. Cable Ampacity calculations should be carried out based on actual soil

thermal resistivity. Samples for soil thermal resistivity measurements shall be taken at every 500m along the cable route. The location of these samples along the route shall be subject to COMPANY review and approval. The soil thermal resistivity shall be determined for 2% moisture on the samples and the highest value shall be used in the calculations. In all cases, whenever the measured values of soil thermal resistivity are less than 1.20 k.m/W, the value of 1.20 k.m/W shall be used in the cable ampacity calculations. And whenever the measured values of soil thermal resistivity are more than 1.20 k.m/W, then actual (higher values) shall be used in the cable ampacity calculations. The backfill material of lower values of soil thermal resistivity shall be used to achieve the required Ampacity.

3. Loading factor for the cables shall be assumed 100%.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm that each of the energized circuits shall be

capable to carry 130% of Normal current capacity of cable as a minimum under all operating conditions, with the other circuit out of service. Cable Ampacity shall be based on a 380kV Cable size of 1000 mm².

5. The vicinity of all the three substations has many Power Cables of different

voltage levels, which are potential heat sources and this has to be considered in the models for Ampacity calculations. Similarly, the proposed route may encounter these cables, which have to be taken into account in the calculations.

6. The Cable design shall optimize on the depth of burial of the Cable. Cable

depths greater than 2000mm may be avoided to have better Ampacity.

7. The CONTRACTOR shall provide enough number of actual cable layout cross-sections along the cable route with Ampacity calculations for each case. The cross sections shall be for expected worst conditions in terms of cable spacing, depth, directional drilling etc. Also, the CONTRACTOR shall specify the minimum rating of 380kV Cables applicable to any configuration of installation such as existing cables, duct banks, directional drilling etc.

8. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm that the bending radius of power cables will

not be less than the recommended values given by the manufacturer along the whole route.

9. The CONTRACTOR shall clarify all parameters/assumptions for which the

calculations are based.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

55 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


10. Number of joints to be kept to minimum for reliability purpose. As far as

possible, the Sheath Induced Voltage of 200V under normal operating conditions and 10000V under fault operating conditions shall be used to calculate the minor section cable length. The detailed calculation to be submitted with the offer.

11. Computer Software used for Current Rating & Sheath Induced Voltage Calculations shall be provided along with its two (2) Dongle Keys at the time of submission of Current Rating & Sheath Induced Voltage Calculations as mentioned above at Item # 2.g of Notes to above Table of Clause # 3.04.

B. Sheath Sizing Calculations The cable metallic sheath shall be sized in accordance with ICEA P-45-482. The

size of cable metallic sheath shall be based on short circuit current of 63kA for 1 second.

C. Arrangement/Grouping of Cables in the Ground

1. Cables grouped in a common cable trench or installed with insufficient spacing from one to another, result in mutual heating. Thus, load capacity of cables is subsequently reduced. Therefore, spacing recommended by COMPANY Standards shall be maintained.

If the right-of-way limits the cable spacing and calculated cable Ampacity is

reduced, necessary mitigation techniques like Soil with lower Thermal resistivity or Bentonite filling in Ducts shall be provided to achieve the required Ampacity.

2. The cables shall not be placed in a close proximity to external heat sources to

the extent practical. 3. The typical Cable Laying cross-section details shall be as per COMPANY

Standard Drawing No: TA-800062 and TA-800063.

D. Metallic Sheath Grounding The grounding system of the power cable shall be designed to limit the induced

voltage on the cable sheath at safe level and to eliminate the sheath losses. For metallic sheath grounding, TES-P-104.08, Rev.01 shall be applied considering

the following:

1. The cables shall be laid in Flat formation using cross-bonding scheme and CONTRACTOR shall submit his design / detailed calculations to comply with all requirements per Electra (28) & Electra (47) CIGRE study for COMPANY review / approval.

2. The power frequency sheath voltage induced under through fault conditions

(3-phase, phase to phase and single phase to ground faults) shall be calculated by the applicable methods and formulas as recommended in Electra (28) & Electra (47) CIGRE study for cross bonding systems.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

56 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


3. Cable sheath voltage limiters shall be installed at location as recommended in

Electra (28) & Electra (47) CIGRE study.

4. The sheath induced voltage shall not exceed 200 Volts, when cable is carrying the specified full load current.

5. The cable sheath induced voltage under fault conditions shall not exceed 10kVrms to ground.

6. The induced shield voltage should be calculated at the worst case and

assuming a short circuit current of 63kA for 1 second.

7. The CONTRACTOR shall sectionalize the total cable length in such a way to satisfy above criteria & clarify all parameters/assumptions for which the calculations are based.

*** END OF SECTION IV ***


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

57 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION V - EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS 5.01 GENERAL This section provides the technical specifications of the following major equipment/

materials:

1. 380kV Power Cable

2. 380kV Cable Terminations and Splice Kits

3. Bonding Cable(1.8/3.0kV) and grounding rods for link Boxes

4. Bonding leads and Sheath insulators

5. Link Boxes

6. Sheath Voltage Limiter

7. Cable Protective Tiles

8. Cable Warning Tapes

9. Steel Wire Mesh

10. Warning Post

11. PVC Conduits and Fittings and HDPE sub ducts

The technical specifications of equipment/materials are provided hereunder. 5.02 380kV POWER CABLES The 380kV power cable shall conform to 380kV Cable SEC Standard 11-TMSS-02,

Rev.01 and the associated Data Schedule and the latest Industry Standards. In addition, the 380kV cable manufacturers shall fully comply with the following production quality requirements as per AEIC CS7,AEIC C S9 & ICEA S-108-720.

1. XLPE Insulation Per Section B.1 of AEIC CS7 and IEC 62067 2. Semi-conducting Shielding, Voids and Protrusions Per Section C.3 of AEIC CS7 and IEC 62067 3. Production Sampling Test and Frequency Per Section D and F.3 respectively of AEIC CS7 and IEC 62067 4. Rejection Criteria for Cable Reel during the Production Sampling Tests Per Section F.3.4 of AEIC CS7 and IEC 60287 Ratings and specific requirements of the cable are given in Data Schedule of

11-TMSS-02, Rev.01.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

58 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


5.03 380kV CABLE TERMINATIONS AND SPLICE KITS The 380kV cable terminations and splice kits to be used for the 380kV Power Cable

mentioned above, shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of COMPANY Materials Standard Specification 12-TMSS-10, Rev.0 and associated Data Schedule.

For the XLPE to GIS terminations, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the GIS Manufacturer/ CONTRACTOR. The GIS Termination shall conform to 12-TMSS-10, Rev.0. 1. General Requirements

a. For cable splicing and terminating, it is mandatory that the CONTRACTOR install the splices and terminations in strict accordance with the cable manufacturer’s instructions.

b. The types of splices may be straight through, insulated or a combination

of both depending upon the Schematic Diagram. Splicing and terminations shall be in accordance with COMPANY’S Standards TES-P-104.04 Rev.01.

c. All Termination and Splice Kits will be of pre-molded type, Type tested at

Independent Laboratory. d. Each cable termination/joint must be installed by a qualified and certified

jointer. e. Quality certificate (check sheet) for each single cable termination/joint

must be filled and signed by the jointer.

f. The contractor must ensure in writing to Project Department that the Cable Accessories stored are as per the manufacturer recommendation.

2. Certification of Splicing Personnel To ensure that the 380kV cable splices and terminations are installed in a

professional and workmanship manner, all cable splicing and terminating personnel shall obtain a certification from the COMPANY before they can commence the WORK. At the approval of COMPANY, this certification may include previous cable manufacturer’s training, or certification at COMPANY splicing and terminating school. The COMPANY shall be the sole judge of certification.

3. Cable Tagging All cables shall be clearly identified with durable non-corroding markers

securely fastened at each splice and at each termination point. Appropriate information shall include the phase and source/destination addresses, feeder number and voltage level.

5.04 GROUNDING CABLE FOR LINK BOX & GROUNDING ROD FOR LINK BOX


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

59 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


The grounding cable for link Box and grounding rods for link box shall be as per

TES-P-104.08, Rev.01. 5.05 BONDING LEADS & SHEATH SECTIONALIZING INSULATORS

The bonding leads shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of COMPANY Materials Standard Specification 12-TMSS-11, Rev.0 and COMPANY Engineering Standard TES-P-104.08, and Rev.01. The size of the Sheath bonding cable shall be 500mm² (min).

5.06 LINK BOXES The link Boxes shall be designed manufactured and tested in accordance with the

COMPANY Materials Standard Specification12-TMSS-11, Rev.0. The materials for Link Boxes in underground pits shall be non-corrodible, non-ferrous materials. Brass or fiberglass is acceptable while stainless steel is not acceptable. Materials of links and connections shall be tinned copper. Link Boxes in underground pits shall be at an acceptable place to be maintained easily. In streets, acceptable places for link box pits are either footpath or road island.

5.07 SHEATH VOLTAGE LIMITER A. Sheath voltage limiter (SVL) shall be provided to limit the transient over voltage on

cable sheaths. Sheath Voltage Limiter shall be provided and tested as per COMPANY Materials Standard Specification 12-TMSS-11, Rev.0.

B. The limiter shall be suitable for continuous operation with applied voltage equal to

the sheath standing voltage under either normal or emergency load. It will have temporary over voltage capability to withstand the induced voltage on sheath under Single line to ground fault/ short circuit conditions.

C. The ratings of the sheath voltage limiter shall be verified by the required calculations

as per TES-P-104.08, Rev.01 and shall be subjected to COMPANY review and approval.

5.08 CABLE WARNING TAPES

The cable warning tape shall be as per TCS-P-104.03.

5.09 WARNING POSTS The warning posts shall conform to the COMPANY standards TD-800007,

TD800008 and TES-P-104.05 Rev.01. Marker posts for buried communication cables shall be in accordance with COMPANY Standard Drawing SB-036365.

5.10. PVC CONDUITS & FITTINGS, AND HDPE SUB DUCTS


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

60 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


A. PVC conduits and fittings shall be provided in all underground concrete duct banks. The PVC conduits and fittings shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the COMPANY’S Materials Standard Specification 23-TMSS-01, Rev.0.

B. Sub ducts on hand holes and inside the building shall be corrugated, flexible and

fire retardant (2 Hours UL rating) with 25mm outside diameter. Sub duct installation shall be in accordance with TCS-T-111.08.

C. Sub ducts on the underground duct banks and direct buried conduits in trenches

shall be rigid with 32mm outside diameter and made from HDPE piping compound, its inner wall shall be smooth and black in color. It shall comply with specification DIN 8074, DIN 8075 and STC specification MAT 2301 and pulling length shall not exceed 450 meters.

D. For direct buried cable trenches, PVC conduits shall be of class-4 type. Nylon pull ropes ¼ inches in diameter (of different colors) shall be provided and installed in all vacant/spare ducts and sub ducts.

E. The duct sealing units for conduit fittings shall be in accordance with COMPANY’S

Materials Standard Specification 23-TMSS-02, Rev.0. F. Unless otherwise indicated, the size of the PVC Conduits for fiber optic cables and

380kV cables shall be 100 mm inner diameter and 150 mm inner diameter respectively.

5.11. INDUSTRIAL SECURITY AND FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Detection and Alarm System

1. Fire Protective Signaling Panel (FPSP) Fire protective signaling panel shall be in accordance with the requirements of

90-TMSS-01. 2. Automatic Fire Detectors Automatic fire detectors shall be in accordance with the requirements of TES-

B-106.01 and TES-P-119.21.

3 Manual Alarm Stations Manual alarm stations shall be in accordance with the requirements of TES-B-

106.01 and TES-P-119.21.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

61 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


4. Audible and Visual Alarm Devices Audible and visual alarm devices shall be in accordance with the requirements

of TES-B-106.01 and TES-P-119.21. 5. Fire Alarm Repeater Panel (FARP) Fire alarm repeater panel shall be per 90-TMSS-01 and shall be integrated

with SAS. 6. Data Printer Data printer shall be in accordance with the requirements of TES-P-119.21. 7. CONTRACTOR shall provide a programming kit (laptop accessories) and

other related items, along with two (2) sets of programming manuals, programming software, alarm system download programming for computerized/addressable fire alarm system.

8. Fire Alarm system shall be integrated with SAS.

B Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System shall comply with the requirements outlined in TES-B-106.05 or TES-B-106.06. It shall also comply with NFPA 2001 (2012 Edition).

NOTE:

Reserve clean agent cylinders shall be connected to the system manifold and filled with the same quantity as the main cylinders.

C. Fire Extinguishers

Fire extinguishers shall be provided in accordance with the requirements outlined in 90-TMSS-03, TES-P-119.21 and hereunder:

Cable Tunnels - 12 kgs. dry chemical, class ABC, cartridge operated, UL listed.

5.12 VENTILATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A.Ventilation Equipment and Materials

1. Cable Tunnels Ventilation / Exhaust Fans

Centrifugal fans complying with SEC Material Standard 73-TMSS-05. Ventilation for tunnels shall include exhaust and supply air fans complete with back draft dampers, fresh air aluminum filters, fresh air intake louvers and control devices for each tunnel partition. The supply air fans shall be filtered & louvered on all sides.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

62 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


B.Execution and Installation

2. General

a. Install the system and equipment in accordance with TCS-K-100,TES-P-119.19 and manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Provide access around equipment for service not less than the manufacturer’s minimum requirement and/or TCS-K-100.01.

5.13 PLUMBING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Plumbing system shall be in accordance with SEC Standard TES-P-119.19 requirements, except for other items as specified below:

A.Plumbing Piping

Piping shall conform to the requirements of SEC Standard 75-TMSS-01.

B. Plumbing Equipment

Sump Pump

The pump shall conform to the requirements of a dewatering pump on SEC Standard 83-TMSS-01. Discharge rate and discharge pipe diameter shall be 4 liters per second (63.41gpm) and 50 mm respectively. The pump motor shall operate on a 230V, 60 Hz, single phase power supply with 3450 rpm rotational speed. The pump shall be provided with control panel (auto/manual operation) complete with level switch and other pump motor protection. The control panel shall be mounted on the wall near the pump not less than 1.0 meter high from the finished floor level.

*** END OF SECTION V ***


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

63 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION VI - INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES 6.01 GENERAL A. The subsequent sections will present the requirements and practices, which shall

be the basis for the installation of 380kV underground cables and Fiber Optic cables for the system of SEC.

B. The installation practices that will be presented are consistent with the current

industry standards with special consideration being given to the working environment found in Saudi Arabia.

C. The CONTRACTOR must strictly adhere to the requirements of COMPANY

Engineering Standard TES-P-104.and TES-T-111, Construction Standard TCS-P-104 and TCS-T-111 as applicable, attached Conceptual Design Drawings, and the Practices and Procedures mentioned in the subsequent sections.

6.02 REEL STORAGE A. 380kV XLPE cables shall be provided in steel cable reels; wooden cable reels are

not accepted. The Fiber Optic generally has wood cable reels with wooden lagging. Proper storage and handling should commence from its arrival to the storage area until its installation.

B. Precautions must be taken to safeguard cable reels from any external mechanical

operating equipment or access to unauthorized persons. C. Care on reel deterioration should be taken if cables are to be stored for extended

period. Wooden reels shall be stored on concrete base or on raised wooden stringers placed under the reel flanges.

D. Cable reels shall be stored in an upright position only. Laying cable reels on their

flat sides are not allowed. E. Refer to COMPANY’S TCS-P-104.02 for specific requirements of reel storage SITE. 6.03 REEL HANDLING A. The handling of cable reels upon receipt, storage and transport to the WORK SITE,

shall be properly performed that will ensure no damage to the cables or reels. B. Prior to moving or loading the cable reels, thorough knowledge and selection of

equipment capabilities and proper tools for handling are essential. C. To prevent reel drum damage when lifting with a crane, a steel shaft of proper

strength, length and diameter are required in the cable reel drum spindle and a spreader bar shall be used with a lifting wire rope sling or chain.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

64 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


D. When transporting cable reels on flat cars or cable trolleys, the cable reels must be properly choked and chained down. The cable reels are to be secured in the transporter through two (2) chains in the reel spindle hole.

E. Other specific requirements as mentioned in the COMPANY’S TCS-P-104.02 shall

be strictly followed in material handling. 6.04 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION A. Cable Pulling Tension and Sidewall Pressure Calculations The CONTRACTOR shall submit pulling procedure/calculations, in the base design

phase, giving anticipated pulling tensions and sidewall pressure calculations for 380kV power cable. The calculations should take into consideration pulling from whichever direction that minimize the pulling tensions and sidewall pressures. COMPANY Standards TES-P-104.05, Rev.01, shall be followed for pulling tensions calculations while the techniques and procedures for the installation shall be in accordance with TCS-P-104.06, Rev.0.

B. Preparation of Trenches

1. The trench bottom and walls shall be carefully inspected; all rocks and other rough materials shall be removed. The Trench shall be prepared as per TCS-P-104-03.

2. The trench depth shall be increased in areas where underground utilities

cross perpendicularly and are located near the trench bottom, so that the cables when laid shall pass underneath the utility with at least 1000 mm clearance. The transition of the cable under the utility shall be carried out gradually. A split conduit shall be provided on the cable, which shall cross the utilities and will overlap utilities by 1000 mm both sides on crossing.

3. Where trenching is taking place in existing roads, shoring is required. Steel

plates shall be provided. Shoring shall extend from the trench bottom to a point above grade level. The shoring shall be adequately braced so that it remains rigidly in place.

4. A 150mm layer of fine, granular, uncontaminated bedding of sand shall be

evenly distributed in the trench. This sand shall exhibit a maximum thermal soil resistivity of 1.2 K.m/W. It shall be the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to test the soil thermal resistivity and verify, to the satisfaction of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE, that the required value has been met. Method of soil treatment proposed by the CONTRACTOR to achieve the above said value shall be submitted to COMPANY for review and approval.

5. Cable rollers shall be placed in the trench at a maximum of 3m apart and

carefully aligned so that the cable during pulling rests in the center of the roller. The rollers shall be carefully maintained and lubricated to ensure that roller friction is minimized. Defective and/or binding rollers shall not be used.

6. Whenever angles and/or bends in the route are encountered, care shall be

taken to ensure that the rollers are properly positioned so that the allowable bending radius of the cable is not exceeded. The rollers shall be adequately


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

65 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


braced against tensions and side pressure that will be encountered during the

cable pull. The transition through the angle and/or bend shall be uniformed to conform to the arc of a circle. Radii at the angles shall be as large as practical to minimize pulling tensions and sidewall pressures. The arc radii shall match those used in tension and sidewall pressure calculations.

7. Special measure shall be taken to avoid the de-rating of cable at the point of entrance in the substation by avoiding the following:

a. The cables should not be laid deeper than the normal depth. b. The cables should not be close / congested together to form a neck.

C. Running Out of Cables

1. Before running out of cables, the capped ends shall be examined by the cable manufacturer’s engineer for water tightness. The factory installed pulling eye shall be inspected for correct installation.

2. The cable drum can be positioned directly on the flat-bed trailer as long as

obstacles in the trench do not prohibit such an action. The cable drum must be equipped with a braking mechanism and aligned at the proper position for cable pulling.

3. A pulling eye hook affixed to the cable pulling eye shall be connected to the

wire rope through a properly sized swivel and shackle. 4. After the facilities and the equipment are properly set, portable telephone shall

be located on the drum side, leading end of the cable and the winch side. They are utilized to control pulling speed and other communications.

5. Cable pulling shall be started gradually. A watchman, who walks along the

cable as it is being pulled, shall observe the leading end of the cable. The rotating speed of the drum shall correspond to the pulling speed. If necessary, the drum rotating speed shall be controlled with a simple wooden brake. The pulling speed must be kept stable.

6. Watchmen are to be maintained at each duct entrance / exit along the

route so that when the cable leading end arrives, it can be directed into the duct without dragging the duct walls.

7. The cable shall be pulled continuously from the upper side of the drum in the

direction indicated on the cable drum.

8. The COMPANY shall inspect and approve any pulling eye, which is installed in the field.

9. During the cable pull, the tension reading from the tension meter shall be

recorded at several intervals. A special tabulation sheet for this record shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. The tension values at each record interval shall be witnessed by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. The CONTRACTOR and the cable manufacturer will affix their signatures to the record sheet at the termination of the cable pull. A copy of the recorded sheet will be submitted to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE on the same day.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

66 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


10. Near joints, cable ducts, cable bending and at all other points where cables

are brought above ground and into buildings, at least 150 mm of cable slack per cable shall be left on each side to allow for ground settlement and for future repairs. As a rule, the cable shall be laid slack in the trenches. At splicing points, cables shall overlap to guarantee proper mounting of the joint.

11. After laying, the cable shall be aligned in flat formation and care shall be taken to ensure that the required spacing is maintained between power cable circuits in a common trench.

12. Plastic ducts shall be placed around the cables for protection at points where

the cables cross in close proximity to other underground utilities & duct banks. 13. The sheath of power cables must be connected to the Substation grounding

system at both ends. All jointing and terminating materials shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.

14. After the cables have been laid in the trench, all duct openings along the

proposed route, at the new Substation and source substation entry points, and new manholes shall be sealed off against ingress of moisture, sand and insects by use of COMPANY Standard duct sealing units in accordance with 23-TMSS-02, Rev.0.

D. Cable Splicing and Terminations

1. General Requirements

a. For cable splicing and terminating, it is mandatory that the CONTRACTOR install the splices and terminations in strict accordance with the cable manufacturer’s instructions.

b. The types of splices may be straight through, isolating, or a combination

of both. Depending upon the particular circuit design, these splices can be ungrounded, grounded or cross grounded. Splicing and terminations shall be in accordance with COMPANY’S Standards TES-P-104.04 Rev.01.

2. Certification of Splicing Personnel To ensure that the 380kV cable splices and terminations are installed in a

professional and workmanship manner, all cable splicing and terminating personnel shall obtain a certification from the COMPANY before they can commence the WORK. At the approval of COMPANY, this certification may include previous cable manufacturer’s training, or certification at COMPANY splicing and terminating school. The COMPANY shall be the sole judge of certification.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

67 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


3. Cable Tagging All cables shall be clearly identified with durable non-corroding markers

securely fastened at each splice and at each termination point. Appropriate information shall include the phase and source/destination addresses, feeder number and voltage level.

E. Link Box Pits

Concrete pits of suitable dimensions to take the link boxes and their associated

bonding and earthing connections shall be installed close to the cable box joint. The pits shall be sealed to prevent ingress of water. The Contractor proposal to prevent ingress of water shall be clearly indicated in the designs submitted. Any sealing method proposed should take account of the Company's requirement to open the pit for maintenance testing purposes and also the life of the seal proposed. The position and design of link box pits and covers shall be to the approval of SEC.

F. Installation of Link Boxes

1. All electrical connections outside each link Box shall be cad-welded and properly insulated to preclude corrosion.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the detailed grounding arrangement at each

link Box location. The location of grounding rods shall be such that the top connections are accessible for testing and inspection at inspection pit. Resistance of the ground rods shall not be more than 2 Ohm. Other grounding requirements as per COMPANY Standard TES-P-104.08, Rev.01 shall be followed.

3. All bonding leads from buried 380kV cable joint up to the link Box should be

through a low surge impedance coaxial cable, 10kV rating PVC insulated single conductor cable and capable of carrying the system short circuit currents (refer to section 5.04).

6.05 380kV CABLE ENTRY INTO SUBSTATION AND CONNECTION INTO GIS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide properly secured cable clamps from the cable

entry ducts in the cellar wall to the sealing end bay positions. The clamps shall be installed every 700mm along the cable route in the cable entry room. The installed clamps shall have sufficient mechanical strength to withstand torques in the cables due to faults, surges. The COMPANY shall approve the clamps prior to installation. All metallic cable supports and accessories (i.e., clamps, sealing) shall be connected (grounded) to the Substation ground grid.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary fireproofing of the cable inside Substations cable entry room/basement at new substation in accordance with COMPANY Engineering Standard TES-P-104.05 Rev.01.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

68 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


C. The 380kV cable circuits shall be tagged immediately on entering the cable cellar with the name of route, length of the route, size of the conductor, voltage level and type of insulation.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall undergo a joint inspection with COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE to select the most suitable cable entry points and the best cable route inside substation basements/cable entry room. Upon completion of the inspection, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a scaled drawing incorporating all the details for COMPANY approval.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate cable loops not less than five (5)

meters in the basement/cable entry room for any future termination work. F. The CONTRACTOR shall make sure that the cable clamping arrangements on steel

supports do not produce circulating current/heat in the steel supports. 6.06 OTHER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Responsibility During Installation The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all materials and component parts

during installation. Failure of any cable and/or component during installation or testing shall cause the

faulty cable and/or component to be unacceptable until all test results are reviewed and corrective action taken. To minimize failures at final testing, the CONTRACTOR should physically check and test the cable in segments during installation preferably before backfilling the cable trench.

*** END OF SECTION VI ***


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

69 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


SECTION VII – COMMISSIONING TESTS 7.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Testing of high voltage cable system shall be carried out to ensure that the

necessary design and operation specifications are achieved prior to placing the cable system into service.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to carry out all tests in a safe manner and

with a predetermined safe working procedure submitted to COMPANY. C. The mechanical check and visual inspection as required in COMPANY’S Standard

TCS-P-105.00 Rev.01 shall be carried out prior to any electrical test. D. In addition to the tests required in this standard, all tests required by the cable

manufacturer shall be performed. In the event of a conflict between the testing requirements of this standard and those of the cable manufacturer, the COMPANY shall be the sole judge as to which tests shall take precedence.

E. All instruments/equipments that belong to CONTRACTOR must have valid

calibration certificate and it shall be available at SITE for COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE’s inspection.

7.02 ELECTRICAL TESTS FOR NEW 380kV XLPE CABLES After completing cable installation, the following tests/ measurements shall be

conducted on the new power cables (laid from the source Substation to the new Substation). These tests/measurements shall be conducted in the presence of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE who will sign the recording document upon completion of the tests/measurements. All testing and measuring instruments and equipment shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.

A. Cable Jacket Test A sheath test shall be performed on the cable jacket after placement and

compaction of the permanent trench backfill. After applying 100 to 150mm of backfill material cover over the cables, a 10kV DC potential shall be applied for 1 minute between the metallic shield and the earth electrode. No electrical breakdown shall occur.

Prior to 10kV DC jacket test, it is necessary to carry out shield insulation resistance

test. This shall be measured by 5000V Mega-Ohm Meter. Each sheath section has to be tested. If the insulation reading is found abnormally low, further physical inspection on sheath connections and the accessories is required and is to repaired after fault location.

Upon successful completion of sheath insulation test, 10kV DC test for one minute

shall be performed on each cable section between link boxes. Maximum allowable leakage current shall be as per TCS-P-104.08.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

70 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


B. Conductor Continuity and Phasing Tests

C. Metallic Shield Continuity Test D. Cable Insulation Test before and after HV AC Test by Mega Ohm Meter E. Cable Profile Radar Test F. High Voltage AC Test G. At Link Boxes following tests are to be carried out. 1: Grounding Resistance Measurement. 2: SVL Insulation Resistance Test. 3: Cross Bonding Verification Test. 4: Contact Resistance Measurement. 5: Insulation Resistance Test. H. Cable Impedance Measurement I. Partial Discharge Measurements Test at all joints and sealing ends

J. Conductor Resistance and Shield Resistance Test

Using a sensitive measuring instrument, conductor DC resistance and shield DC resistance shall be measured. Accuracy required up to three (3) decimals. For comparison with theoretical figure, the obtained readings shall be corrected to 20oC.

K. All above tests shall be as detailed in the COMPANY Construction Standard TCS-

P-104.08 and TCS-P-105.00 Rev.01. L. U/G Portion (calculated Impedances & measured Impedances) Positive sequence impedance and zero sequence impedance The CONTRACTOR shall provide cable data (i.e., size, type, configuration, length,

Method of grounding, etc ;) along with the Impedances (calculated and measured values) for COMPANY review and approval during construction stage of the PROJECT.

Also, the CONTRACTOR shall provide cable data and impedances to the

SUBSTATION CONTRACTOR for protection setting/ coordination purpose during construction stage of the PROJECT.

7.03 ELECTRICAL TESTING OF LINK BOX The link Box shall be tested prior to installation by test voltage as specified in of 12-

TMSS-11(Rev.0). After installation, the link Box shall be tested in accordance to TCS-P-105.00 Rev.01. The ground resistance shall be measured at all link Box positions.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

71 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


7.04 Field Tests on 380kV cables:

Field testing of the whole cable system shall be in accordance to applicable SEC Engineering Standard and IEC 60627. Following sequence of testing work procedure shall be adopted:

1. Preparation of Site Commissioning Test and Inspection

The CONTRACTOR shall complete all mechanical works, pre-electrical Tests and pre-final documentation consisting of marked-up construction drawings, pre-Commissioning Test results system and equipment manuals before inviting COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for commissioning tests and inspection.

2. Scheduling Commissioning Tests and Inspection

All Testing and Commissioning activities shall be coordinated with and witnessed by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR’S invitation to the COMPANY to witness the Commissioning Tests and Inspection shall be made fourteen (14) days in advance accompanied by:

- Marked-up Construction Drawings - Pre-Commissioning Test Results - System / Equipment Manuals

3. Test and Inspection Checklist

The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the COMPANY, 380kV Power Cable Checklist of Acceptance Tests and Inspection covering documentation, mechanical inventory and tests requirements for PROJECT acceptance. (380kV Cable Acceptance Test and Inspection Checklist shall be used)

4. Correction of Discrepancies

A re-inspection and re-test, to be witnessed by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE is required to clear the CONTRACTOR of any outstanding discrepancy found during commissioning test and inspection. A re-test and re-inspection of related parameters shall also be conducted to ensure that these are not affected by the aforementioned discrepancies.

5. Acceptance Test and Inspection related Activities

The stages of acceptance test and inspection shall be performed: a. Scheduling of test and inspection by the CONTRACTOR, the date to be

agreed upon by both COMPANY and CONTRACTOR, and submission by the CONTRACTOR and approval by the COMPANY of documents mentioned above.

b. Validation of Marked-up Construction Drawings (done throughout the test and inspection process).

c. Inventory and Mechanical Inspection of installed equipment. d. Verification of validity of test equipment to be used in the tests.


PTS-12CC348, 02/12/2012


REVISIONS


BA CERTIFIED



NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C 640 A PTS 12CC348

72 OF 72

0 JOB ORDER NO.


e. Performance and/or functional tests after are done and all service

affecting discrepancies corrected. Unavailability of documents essential for safe energization, operation and troubleshooting of the installed equipment are considered Service Affecting Discrepancies.

f. Signing of TCC (Technical Completion Certificate) after all stated stages are completed and accepted.

g. Trial period of one month after clearing all outstanding discrepancies and acceptance of the final test results.

h. Signing of PAC (Performance Acceptance Certificate) after successful completion of the trial period.

*** END OF SECTION VII & SOW/TS ***

APPENDICES

APPENDIX- I LIST OF ATTACHED CONCEPTUAL DESIGN AND REFERENCE DRAWINGS APPENDIX- II MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES APPENDIX- III TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS FORMS APPENDIX- IV BID STANDARD FORMAT APPENDIX- V OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS

APPENDIX- VI COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX- VII PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (BY oTHER cONTRACTOR)

APPENDIX-VIII CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS APPENDIX- IX N/A APPENDIX- X N/A

APPENDIX- XII N/A

APPENDIX-XIII SPECIAL TOOLS & EQUIPMENT

(to be provided by Contractor)

APPENDIX- XVI GEOTECHNICAL AND CONCRETE INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING (APPLICABLE IF REQUIRED)

EXHIBIT- 1 COMPANY FORM NO.16511 (2/10)

APPENDIX - I

LIST OF ATTACHED

CONCEPTUAL AND REFERENCE DRAWINGS

APPENDIX I

LIST OF ATTACHED CONCEPTUAL AND REFERENCE DRAWINGS

Page 1 of 1

A. Conceptual Drawings The conceptual drawings prepared for this project are listed in the Drawing control sheet CT‐ 906044 given in the following page and are included as attachment to this Scope of WORK and Technical Specifications:

NO. DATE

PTS-12CC348 1 TO 72 CT-906044 1 OF 1

CT-906045 1 OF 1CT-906046 1 TO 2

INDEX REV. NO.

X 01 OF 01 01

THIS DRAWING AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ELECTRICITY CO. NO REPRODUCTION IN FULL OR IN PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.

AS BUILTBY

SHEET NO.

CT-906044DRAWING NO.PLANT NO.

- C-640PROJECT COMPLETION DATE

-

SLD OF QASSIM-4 (9032) BSPCABLE ROUTE DRAWING

INDEX - P

DRAWING TITLE

PROJECT TITLE

REMARKSDRAWING NO. SHEET NO.

SEC

DRAWING CONTROL SHEET

INITIAL REV. NO.

PROJECT MANAGER / ENGINEER DRAFTING OFFICECONTRACT NO.

FURTHER REV.

الشركة السعودية للكھرباءSaudi Electricity Company

JOB ORDER NO.

-

DRAWING CONTROL SHEET

INDEX - A

Constructionof 380KV Cable Line fromGT art Qassim PowerPLant To GIS at Qassim-4(9032)380KV Substation

SAUDI ARABIARIYADH

EXISTING GAS TURBINE UNITS

NOS. 24,25,26&27

ASPHALT ROAD

ASPHALT ROAD

CYCLO

NE FEN

CE

GATEENTRANCE

GA

NT

RY 8

824 A

RO

AD C

UR

VE

ASPH

ALT R

OAD

ASP

HALT R

OA

D

M.H

CYCLONE FENCE

ASPHALT ROAD

ASPHALT ROAD

AS

PH

ALT R

OA

D

ASPHALT ROAD

AS

PH

ALT R

OA

D

ASPHALT ROADASPHALT ROAD

5M

WID

E 380kV C

ABLE TU

NNEL

FIR

EW

AL

L

5M WIDE 380kV

CABLE TUNNEL

132kV DUCT BANK

FIR

EW

ALL

MANHOLE

MANHOLE

GATEHOUSEGATE

TOILET

SPACE FOR CAR PARKING

5M

WID

E 380kV C

ABLE TU

NNEL

CYCLONE FENCE

ASPHALT ROAD

ASPHALT ROAD

ASPHALT ROAD

5M

WID

E 380kV C

ABLE TU

NNEL

FIREWALL

(TYP.)

FIR

EW

AL

L

MANHOLE

MANHOLE

CL SGT #04

GATE

PROPOSED ROAD

GATE

ASPHALT ROAD

SHELTER

MODULA

R TELEC

OM

PROPOSE EXTER

NAL

GATE

PACU

RMU

DISTR

IBUTIO

N

TO FU

TURE

HOUSE

FIRE P

UMP

GROUND FLOOR PLANCONTROL BLDG.

MANHOLE

RMU

132kV GIS BLDG. PACU

=D13=D12

UP

FIRE PROTECTION

EQUIPMENT ROOM

(5550x10800)(5550x10800)

STORE(5500x7100)

OFFICE

(5550x3500)TOILET

CORRIDOR

(11500x8700)CONFERANCE ROOM

(5600x8700)TEST ROOM

RELAY

(10925x8700)COMMUNICATION ROOM

(4350x10800)13.8kV SWGR ROOM

CABLE CHUTE

PLATFORM

PACU

PACU

(1212

5x8

700)

BATTER

Y R

OO

M FOR FO

UR (4) C

KTS.

SPARE D

UCT B

ANK

FOR FOUR (4) CKTS. SPARE DUCT BANK FOR FOUR (4) CKTS. SPARE DUCT BANK

6.0

61

STEAM TURBINE #2

EXISTING GAS TURBINE UNITS

NOS. 20,21,22&23

380kV GIS

S/S 9032

QCPP-III

0.6

0

7.83

8.0

1

45.2

3

NO

RE

PR

OD

UC

TIO

N IN

FU

LL

OR IN

PA

RT

SH

AL

L

BE

OB

TAIN

ED

FR

OM

THIS

DO

CU

ME

NT

WIT

HO

UT

TH

E

WRIT

TE

N

CO

NS

EN

T

OF IT

S

OW

NE

R.

JOB ORDER NO.INDEXPLANT NO.REV. NO. DRAWING NUMBERSHEET NO.

NOTES

LEGEND

00

01 of 01

DRAWN BY

OPR’G. DEPT.

CHECKED BY SCALE:

DATE COMPLETED

ENG. DEPT.

REV.

NO.DATE DESCRIPTION

DATE STARTED

CERT. APPD.BY CHKD.

DRAWING TITLE DRAWING NO.

REFERENCE DRAWINGS

THIS

DR

AWIN

G

AN

D

TH

E IN

FO

RM

ATIO

N

CO

NT

AIN

ED

HE

REIN

AR

E

TH

E

SO

LE

PR

OP

ER

TY

OF

BY DATE

CERTIFIED

MATERIAL UNTIL CERTIFIED AND DATED

CONSTRUCTION OR FOR ORDERING

THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO BE USED FOR

PLANT NO. REV. NO.DRAWING NUMBER SHEET NO.JOB ORDER NO. INDEX

QASSIM SAUDI ARABIA

00

NTS

01 of 01

RCI

EHV-E&DD E&DD/ESD

2.5M X 2.5M TUNNEL

CONSTRUCTION OF 380KV CABLE LINE FROM

APPROXIMATE ROUTE LENGHT

1.STEAM TURBINE #1 TO S/S 9032= 600M


POWER PLANT PROJECT OFFICE.

BASED ON INFORMATION COLLECTED FROM SEC QASSIM

THIS DRAWING SHOWS A TENTATIVE CABLE ROUTE

MODIFY THE ROUTE ACCORDINGLY.

ABOUT ANY OBSTACLE (UTILITIES) ON THE ROUTE &

CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE ROUTE & INFORM SEC

SEC.

ROUTE PROPOSED BY CONTRACTOR AND APPROVED BY

ACTUAL LENGTH OF THE ROUTE WILL BE AS PER

1.

2.

3.

GT AT QASSIM PLANT TO GIS AT QASSIM-4

BA

BA 03-12-2012


(9032) 380KV SUB-STATION

CT-906045 C-640 P

DRAWING CONTROL NUMBER CT-906044

PTS. 12CC348

CT-906045C-640P

SCOPE_OF_WORK_&_TECHNICAL_SPECIFICATIONS

STEAM TURBINE #1

COMBINED CYCLE

STEAM TURBINE #3

STEP UP TRANSFORMER

N

SPACE FOR FUTURECOMBINED CYCLE

SPACE FOR FUTURE

NO

RE

PR

OD

UC

TIO

N IN

FU

LL

OR IN

PA

RT

SH

AL

L

BE

OB

TAIN

ED

FR

OM

THIS

DO

CU

ME

NT

WIT

HO

UT

TH

E

WRIT

TE

N

CO

NS

EN

T

OF IT

S

OW

NE

R.


NOTES

NOTES

CT-906046 PC64001 of 02

DRAWN BY

OPR’G. DEPT.

CHECKED BY SCALE:

DATE COMPLETED

ENG. DEPT.

REV.

NO.DATE DESCRIPTION

DATE STARTED

CERT. APPD.BY CHKD.


REFERENCE DRAWINGS

THIS

DR

AWIN

G

AN

D

TH

E IN

FO

RM

ATIO

N

CO

NT

AIN

ED

HE

REIN

AR

E

TH

E

SO

LE

PR

OP

ER

TY

OF

BY DATE

CERTIFIED





QASSIM SAUDI ARABIA

CT-906046C640P00

NONE

01 of 02

THMRCI

EHV-E&DD E&DD/ESD

MAIN ONE LINE DIAGRAM

BA

380kV

NEW QASSIM-4 (9032) 380/132kV SUBSTATION

DRAWING CONTROL SHEET 906044

SCOPE OF WORK TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PTS. 12CC348

11-12-2012

SCOPE OF WORK AS PER PTS-12CC348

SF6/OIL BUSHING TERMATION

>>

>>

13.8kV CIRCUIT BREAKER

C-7 C-5 C-3 C-1

ST-1

CABLE TERMINATION

G20 G21 G22 G23

XLPE CABLE PER PHASE

380kV,1CX1000sq.mm. 2

00

NO

RE

PR

OD

UC

TIO

N IN

FU

LL

OR IN

PA

RT

SH

AL

L

BE

OB

TAIN

ED

FR

OM

THIS

DO

CU

ME

NT

WIT

HO

UT

TH

E

WRIT

TE

N

CO

NS

EN

T

OF IT

S

OW

NE

R.


NOTES

NOTES

CT-906046 PC640

00

02 of 02

1.

CONSTRUCTION.

PREPARE DETAILED DRAWINGS FOR ENGINEERING AND

THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

DRAWN BY

OPR’G. DEPT.

CHECKED BY SCALE:

DATE COMPLETED

ENG. DEPT.

REV.

NO.DATE DESCRIPTION

DATE STARTED

CERT. APPD.BY CHKD.


REFERENCE DRAWINGS

THIS

DR

AWIN

G

AN

D

TH

E IN

FO

RM

ATIO

N

CO

NT

AIN

ED

HE

REIN

AR

E

TH

E

SO

LE

PR

OP

ER

TY

OF

BY DATE

CERTIFIED





QASSIM SAUDI ARABIA

CT-906046C640P 00

NONE

02 of 02

THMRCI

EHV-E&DD E&DD/ESD

2.

STUDY.

SHALL BE DECIDED BASED ON THE TRANSFERED OVER VOLTAGE

THE RATING OF 13.8kV SIDE SURGE ARRESTER FOR TRANSFORMER

3.

ON EMTDC/INSULATION COORDINATION STUDY AS REQUIRED.

380kV SA SHOWN ARE ADDITIONAL SA SHALL BE PROVIDED BASED

MAIN ONE LINE DIAGRAM

BA

380kV

NEW QASSIM-4 (9032) 380/132kV SUBSTATION

DRAWING CONTROL SHEET 906044

SCOPE OF WORK TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PTS. 12CC348

11-12-2012

SCOPE OF WORK AS PER PTS-12CC348

SF6/OIL BUSHING TERMATION

ST-2

C-2 C-4 C-6 C-8


380kV,1CX1000sq.mm.

ST-3

2


380kV,1CX1000sq.mm.

2

CABLE TERMINATION

GENERATION

SPARE FOR FUTURE

APPENDIX- II

MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES

(SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS)

APPENDIX II

(MATERIAL DATA SCHEDULES /SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT

The following COMPANY Material Standard Specifications Data Schedules are attached. The CONTRACTOR shall fill out the Data Schedule indicating the technical particulars of the equipment offered by him. In no case, the data specified by the COMPANY in the Data Schedule shall be erased or altered by the CONTRACTOR while he fills out his data.

1.

2.

10-TMSS-05

(Rev.01)

Bare, Copper-Clad Steel Grounding Conductor and Ground Rod

3.

11-TMSS-02

(Rev. 01)

Power Cable, XLPE Insulated, Copper Conductor, Single Core, 110kV, 115kV, 132kV, 230kV or 380kV Rating

4.

11-TMSS-03

(Rev. 0)

Power Cable, LPOF, Copper Conductor, Single Core,

110kV, 115kV, 132kV, 230kV or 380kV Rating

5.

11-TMSS-10

(Rev. 01)

Power and/or Control Cable, Cu or Al Conductor,600/1000V Rating

6.

12-TMSS-10

(Rev.0)

Splice & Termination Kits for Power Cables 69kV, 110kV

115kV, 132kV, 230kV and 380kV

7.

12-TMSS-11

(Rev.0)

Link Boxes for Power Cables

8.

23-TMSS-01

(Rev.0)

PVC Conduits & Fittings for Underground Cables

9.

23-TMSS-02

(Rev. 0)

Duct Sealing Units

10.

23-TMSS-04

(Rev. 0)

Cable Clamps for Power Cables

11.

24-TMSS-01

(Rev.01)

Metallic Cable Tray Systems

70-TMSS-03

(Rev.01)

Normal Weight Ready-Mixed Portland Cement Concrete

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

2500

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

12CC313

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

12CC313

QSR-TMKhan

Typewritten Text

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

12CC313

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

QSR-TMKhan

Typewritten Text

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION r % 24-TMSS-01, Rev. 01

6.0 DATA SCHEDULE

METALLIC CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

SEC Enquiry No.

SEC Purchase OrderNo. or Contract No.

Date:

Date:

SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No.

REFERENCESECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'C'

3.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

Applicable industry standard

4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

4.2 Design Criteria

DesignationSpan load classSpan length (mm)

***

Working load capacity (kg/m)

Safety factor

Maximum deflection (mm)

4.3 Materials

Type of material (Al / Steel)

Type of surface protection

1.5

12

If aluminum alloy,If carbon steel,

SEC SPECIFIED DATA/PARAMETER.BIDDER/SUPPLIER/VENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA/PARAMETERS.

'C'- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'.(*)- DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDED/PROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/

VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'.

24TMSSO1R01/NAQ Date of Approval: June 19, 2012 PAGE NO. 12 OF 14

QSR-TMKhan

Typewritten Text

12CC348

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION r ° 24-TMSS-01, Rev. 01 ti

6.0 DATA SCHEDULE


REFERENCESECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'C'

4.4 Fabrication

Type of Cable Tray (Ladder, Trough, SolidBottom, Channel)

Width/depth of cable tray, as applicableLadder (mm/mm)Trough (mm/mm)Solid Bottom (mm/mm)Channel (mm/mm)

Rung spacing for ladder type tray (mm)Free base area of cable ladder (%)Free base area classification of cable ladder

Perforation in the base area for trough typetray (%)Perforation base area classifcation

Minmum temperature classification (°C)

Maximum temperature classification (°C)

Impact resistance up to (J)

Minimum thickness of material (mm)

Moment of Ineria (mm4)

Section modulus for two side rails (mm3)

Are Cable Barriers Required?

Finish touch up

2

Yes / No

24TMSSO1R01/NAQ Date of Approval: June 19, 2012 PAGE NO. 13 OF 14

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION * 24-TMSS-01, Rev. 01

6.0 DATA SCHEDULE


ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION OR FEATURES TO BE FURNISHED BYSEC:

ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OR FEATURES PROPOSED BYBIDDERNENDOR/SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR:

C. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDER/VENDOR/SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR:

Actual Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier/of Equipment/Material Contractor

Name of the CompanyLocation and address

Name and Signature ofauthorizedepresentativeand date

Official Seal/Stampof the Company &Date

24TMSSO1R01/NAO Date of Approval: June 19, 2012 PAGE NO, 14 OF 14

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

MODERATE

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

TYPE- II

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

350

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

*

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

*

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

28

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

0.40

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

75

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

*

QSR-TMKhan

Typewritten Text

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION \r

1/44. 70-TMSS-03, Rev. 01

12.0 DATA SCHEDULE

NORMAL WEIGHT READY-MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

SEC Enquiry No. Date:

SEC Purchase Order No. Date:or Contract No.

SEC PTS No./Project Title with J.O. No.

REFERENCESECTION NO. DESCRIPTION 'A' 'B' 'C'

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

i) Coarse Aggregates

TypeMass (kg/m3)Nominal Size (mm)

.1) Admixture:

TypeBrandDosage (Um')

10.0 TESTS

10.2.2 Frequency of Sampling forCompressive Strength/m3

10.2.4 Rapid Chloride Permeability Test(ASTM C1202)Frequency of Permeability Test/m3

Yes/No

Chloride Permeability Test (ASTM C1543) Yes/No

SEC SPECIFIED DATA/PARAMETERBIDDER/SUPPLIER/VENDOR/CONTRACTOR PROPOSED DATA/PARAMETERS

'C'- REMARKS SUPPORTING THE PROPOSED DEVIATION IN COLUMN 'B'(*)- DATA/PARAMETER TO BE PROVIDED/PROPOSED BY THE BIDDER/SUPPLIER/

VENDOR/CONTRACTOR IN COLUMN 'B'

70TMSSO3R01/SZA Date of Approval: January 31, 2012 PAGE NO. 37 OF 38

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

*

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

*

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

*

QSR-TMKhan

Text Box

SEC 10.2.2

QSR-TMKhan

Line

TRANSMISSION MATERIALS STANDARD SPECIFICATION r 70-TMSS-03, Rev. 01

12.0 DATA SCHEDULE

NORMAL WEIGHT READY-MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION OR FEATURES TO BE FURNISHED BYSEC:

ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OR FEATURES PROPOSED BYBIDDER/VENDOR/SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR:

B. OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED UP BY BIDDER/VENDOR/SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR:

Actual Manufacturer Vendor/Supplier/of Equipment/Material Contractor

Name of the CompanyLocation and address

Name and Signature ofauthorized Representativeand date

Official Seal/Stampof the Company & Date

70TMSSO3R01/SZA Date of Approval: January 31, 2012 PAGE NO, 38 OF 38

APPENDIX - III

TECHNICAL DATA MANUALS

1. Technical Data Manuals The CONTRACTOR shall provide Technical Data Manuals as applicable for

the substation equipment and underground cable systems installed under the PROJECT. The CONTRACTOR shall submit at least two (2) sets of manuals for review and approval by the COMPANY at least two (2) months prior to the techinical completion date of the PROJECT. After COMPANY approval, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) sets of final approved manuals two (2) weeks before technical completion date of the PROJECT.

2. Substation Equipment The Technical Data Manuals for the substation equipment, as applicable, shall

include the following information as a minimum pertaining to the major substation equipment installed under the PROJECT.

a. Equipment for which TMSS and SMSS Data Schedule is available.

A copy of manufacturer’s nameplate of the equipment. Name of the manufacturer and equipment serial number shall be

specified in the attached Form No. PTD-EQP-DS1.

Updated Data Schedules attached to the COMPANY Materials Standard Specification (TMSS and SMSS) after manufacture of the equipment, and stamped by the manufacturer.

The Technical Data is required for the following substation equipment: - 380kV XLPE Cables - 380kV XLPE Cable Termination and Splicing Kits - Line Boxes - Sheath Voltage Limiters - Surge Arresters - DTS

3. Underground Cables

The CONTRACTOR shall provide technical data applicable for XLPE Cables, splices and terminations as per details of updated data schedules of the relevant COMPANY material standard specifications (TMSS and SMSS) stamped by the manufacturer. In addition to the above mentioned TMSS and SMSS data schedules, the CONTRACTOR shall provide additional information in the attached form no. PTD-UGC DS6

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

APPENDIX - IV

BID STANDARD FORMAT

REVISIONS

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY الشركة السعودية للكهرباء

PREPARED BY:

DATE:

CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

CERTIFIED

BY:

DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR

CONSTRUCTION OR

FOR ORDERING

MATERIALS UNTIL CERTIFIED AND DATED

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 380KV CABLE LINE FROM GT AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS AT QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

PTS-12CC348

C640 A PTS 12CC348

APPENDIX-IV 0 JOB ORDER NO.

NO

.

3

2

1

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

N

CH

K’D

A

PP

’D

CE

RT

.

PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.

APPENDIX IV

BID STANDARD FORMAT The BIDDER shall fill in Annex A & C which shows equipment salient features along with the Technical Proposal. The BIDDER shall also fill Annex B which shows the documents submitted along with the Technical Proposal

Note : Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project Page 1 of 1

ANNEX AContract No.Project Titile:

EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS

No. Description of Equipment/Material Type/Model Manufacturer Country of

OriginTech. Info. In Section#

A UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSIONLINE MATERIAL

1 XLPE or LPOF U/G Cable 380kV 230kV 132kV 110kV 36kV 13.8KV

2 Non-metallic Fiber Optic Cable3 Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment

Low Density SDH

4 Pilot Cable, 19 pairs5 Link Box for U/G Power Cable6 Sheath Voltage Limiter7 380kV Splice kits 8 380kV Termination kits

B O/H TRANSMISSION LINE EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL

1 Overhead Line Conductor2 Overhead Ground Wire3 Tubular Steel Pole4 Lattice Steel Structure5 Wood Pole6 Disconnect Switch

380kV 230kV 110kV 132kV

7 Line Post Insulator 380kV 230kV 110kV 69kV

8 Suspension Insulator 380kV 132kV 110kV 69kV

9 Composite Overhead OpticalFiber Ground Wire (OPGW)

10 Fiber Optic Joint Box11 Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment *

Low Density SDH

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

Note : Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project Page 1 of 1

ANNEX BContract No.Project Titile:

SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

No. Description of Equipment/Material

Statement of Compliance

Data Schedule

Manufacturer'sCatalogs

Type Test

ReportList of Users

A UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSIONLINE MATERIAL

1 XLPE or LPOF U/G Cable 380kV 230kV 132kV 110kV 69kV 36 Kv 13.8kV

2 Non-metallic Fiber Optic Cable3 Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment

Low Density SDH

4 Pilot Cable, 19 pairs5 Link Box for U/G Power Cable6 Sheath Voltage Limiter7 380kV Splice kits 8 380kV Termination kits

B O/H TRANSMISSION LINE EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL

1 Overhead Line Conductor2 Overhead Ground Wire3 Tubular Steel Pole4 Lattice Steel Structure5 Wood Pole6 Disconnect Switch

380kV 132kV 110kV

7 Line Post Insulator 380kV 132kV 110kV

8 Suspension Insulator 380kV 132kV 110kV

9 Composite Overhead OpticalFiber Ground Wire (OPGW)

10 Fiber Optic Joint Box11 Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment

Low Density SDH

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

ANNEX CContract No.Project Titile:

SUMMARY OF PROPOSED PROTECTIVE RELAYS


Manufacturer Country of Origin

Type/ Model

Tech. Info. In Section #

1 Relay & Control Panels 2 Feeder Protectiona. Distance Relay

Set 1 (2IP) Set 2 (2IS)

b. Directional Comparison Earth Fault Relay Set 1 (67NP) Set 2 (67NS)

c. Longitudinal/Pilot Wire Differential Relay Set 1 (87LP) Set 2 (87LS)

d. Back-up Inverse Time OvercurrentRelay with Instantaneous Unit Phase (50/51) Neutral (50/51N)

e. Back-up Directional OvercurrentRelay with Instantaneous Unit Phase (50/51) Neutral (67N)

f. Synchrocheck Relay (25)g. Auto Reclosing Relay (79)h. PT Fuse Failure Relay3 Power Transformer Protectiona. OLTC Control Panelb. Differential Relay (87 T)c. Restricted Earth Fault Relay

HV Side (87 REF-HV) LV Side (87 REF-HV)

d. Back-up HV side OvercurrentRelay with or without Inst.Unit Phase (50/51) Neutral (50/51N) Ground (50/51G)

e. Back-up Secondary side Directional Overcurrent Relay with or without Inst. Unit Phase (67) Neutral (67G)

f. Back-up LV side Neutral OvercurrentRelay with or without Inst.Unit

g. Tertiary Winding Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with or without Instantaneous Unit (50/51TW)

h. HV Side Over Fluxing Relay (24T)4 Grounding Transformer Protectiona. Restricted Earth Fault Relay (87 GT)

Note: 1. Strike-off items which are not applicable to this project. 2. In case different make/type/model of same kind of relays are proposed for different applications list them all.

Page 1 of 3

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image





Type/ Model


b. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with/without Intantaneous Unit Phase (50/51 GT) Neutral (50/51 GGT)

5 Station Service Transformer Protectiona. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with

Intantaneous Unit (50/51)6 Bus Bar Protectiona. Bus Bar Differential Relay (87 B)b. Bus Bar Differential Check Relay (87B)c. CT Open Circuit Supervision Relay7 Bus Sectionalizing and /or Bus Coupler

Breaker Protectiona. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with/

without Intantaneous Unit Phase (51BT) Neutral (51NBT)

8 Breaker and Protection Circuit FailureSupervision

a. Breaker Failure Relay (50 BF)b. DC Supervision Relay

Set 1 Set 2

c. Trip Circuit Supervision Relay Set 1 Set 2

d. Trip Coil Supervision Relay Set 1 Set 2

9 Reactor Protectiona. Differential Relayb. Restricted Earth Fault Relayc. Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay with/

without Intantaneous Unit Phase (50/51)

Neutral (50/51N)10 Capacitor Bank Protectiona. Harmonic Desensitized Instantaneous

Overcurrent Relay Phase Set 1 (50P) Phase Set 2 (50S) Neutral Set 1 (50NP) Neutral Set 2 (50NS)

b. Short Time Overcurrent Relay Phase Set 1 (51P) Phase Set 2 (51S1) Neutral Set 1 (51NP) Neutral Set 2 (51NS)

c. Overcurrent Relay with Harmonic Filterfor Mid-point Unbalance Set 1 (59P) Set 2 (59S)


Page 2 of 3





Type/ Model


d. For Neutral Point Unbalance Set 1 (59NP) Set 2 (59NS)

e. Bus Over Voltage Relays Set 1 (59BP) Set 2 (59BS)

f. Bus Under Voltage Relay Set 1 (27BP) Set 2 (27BS)

11 Protection Signalling/CommunicationInterface Equipment

a. For Distance Protectionb. For Pilot Wire Differential Protectionc. Breaker Failure Schemed. For Longitudinal Differential Protection12 Other Relaysa. Under frequency Relay (81)b. Lockout Relay (86)c. Timers (62)d. Tripping Relay (94)e. Tripping & Lockout Relay Supervisionf. DC Supply Supervision Relay (74)g. Test Switches13 Bidder to Specify and List other Relays

and Devices


Page 3 of 3

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

APPENDIX - V

LIST OF OPERATIONAL

SPARE PARTS

VOLTAGE : TYPE : ________________

MANUFACTURER :_______________‎‎ YEAR OF MANUFACTURE :_____________

(A)

SEC REQ.

QTY.

10% OF THE ITEM USED

NoteThe bidder shall offer complete list of manufacturer recommended operational spare parts as required for the DTS

OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS FOR 380KV UNDERGROUND CABLES

DISTRIBUTED TEMPERATURE SENSORS (DTS)

ITEM

NO.ITEM DESCRIPTION MFR. NAME

PART NO. /

TYPE

(B)

MFR.REC. QTY. (FOR 10 YRS

OPERATION)

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

TYPE: _________

MANUFACTURER :___________________‎‎

(A) (B)

SEC

REQ.

QTY.1 380kV XLPE Power Cable 1000mm² 80M2 Sheath Voltage limiter(As used) 25 Nos.3 Link Box 5Nos.4 380kV SF6/XLPE Termination 3Nos.5 380kV Cable joints isolated type 12Nos.6 380kV Cable joints straight through type 12Nos.

7

Low voltage coaxial cables 400mm²

suitable to connect the link boxes and joints 20 M

NOTES: The bidder should submit itemize prices and complete technical data.

MFR.

NAME

PART

NO./

TYPE

MFR.REC. QTY.

(FOR 10 YRS OPERATION)

The bidder shall omit those items that are not applicable to this equipmentand shall recommend required spares instead of the omitted items.

CABLING AND TERMINATION

OPERATIONAL SPARE PARTS FOR 380KV UNDERGROUND CABLES

VOLTAGE : 380 kV

CAPACITY:

YEAR OF MANUFACTUR :___________

ITEM

NO.ITEM DESCRIPTION

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

APPENDIX - VI

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS


CONSTRUCTION OF 380 KV CABLE LINE FROM GT AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS AT QASSIM-4 ( 9032 )

380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640

PTS-12CC348 JOB ORDER NO.

NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

1 OF 17

PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. PAGE NO. REV.

National Grid SA

0

//CS-0966/REV.0/ 9032-Qassim PP

SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR


380 KV SUBSTATION

PTS-12CC348

APPENDIX – VI UNDERGROUND FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND DUCTBANK SYSTEM

AND LINK REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (OSP/ISP)

OCTOBER 2012

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

2 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.01 COMMUNICATION WORKS 1.02 OTHER WORKS TO BE DONE BY THE CONTRACTOR 1.03 REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGE CABLE 1.04 SPECIFIC SEC STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS 2 MATERIALS 2.01 OPTICAL FIBERS CABLE 2.03 FIBER OPTICS JOINT BOXES ( if applicable ) 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATIONS 4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 4.01 ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS

FOR TESTING OF FIBER OPTIC CABLES

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

3 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


SECTION 1- SCOPE OF WORK 1.01 COMMUNICATION WORKS

a. 380kV U/G WORKS BETWEEN S/S 9032 & Qassim Power Plant 1. TRANSMISSION LINE WORK (BETWEEN S/S 9032 & Qassim Power Plant)

1.01 CONTRACTOR shall provide, install, test and commission three ( 3 ) 48 cores, Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted (ITU-T G.655) Single-mode Underground Non Metallic Fiber Optic Cable (UGNMFOC) from S/S 9032 to Qassim Power Plant ( up to the existing / proposed optical fiber management rack/ Fiber Splice Termination Panel (OFMR/FSTP) at 380/132/13.8 kV BSP Communication Room at S/S 9032 & Qassim Power Plant via the proposed/Existing Communication Duct bank. Contractor to finalize the FOC length during the Base Design Stage (See Attached Drawing A).

Note: Incase the proposed FSTP are unable to be accommodated inside in ANY of the existing OFMR or at ALL site, new OFMR shall be proposed by the CONTRACTOR.

b. COMMUNICATION DUCTBANK & UNDERGROUND FIBER OPTIC CABLING WORK AT 380kV BSP 9032 & Qassim Power Plant ( if the existing Ductbank can to be used to lay the proposed cable) :

a) CONTRACTOR shall construct a new communications ductbank and handhole system at Qassim Power Plant & S/S 9032 Concrete encased ductbank shall be a minimum of 4-way x 110 mm ducts configuration as per SEC standard drawing TB-800079. The 110mm rigid PVC conduit (each) shall be provided with four (4) 32mm diameter rigid HDPE subduct or COMPANY approved equivalent. Spare duct/subduct shall be provided with different color of nylon ropes and end plugs. Connection shall be made watertight. Concrete encased ductbank in all road crossings shall be in accordance with COMPANY construction standard.

b) CONTRACTOR shall construct and install Communication Handholes/Manhole, as reference to COMPANY (SEC) Standards drawing numbers TB-800096 (for manhole type-1), TB-800076 (for non-traffic areas), TB-800077 (for traffic areas) and TA-80098 for accessories. Handholes/manhole shall be provided with all necessary clamps and fixing hardware to enable coiling the extra length of fiber optic cable.

c) CONTRACTOR shall provide and install communication cable trays and pull box as required

and necessary to completely route the underground fiber optic cable (UGNMFOC) up to the designated location of the optical fiber management rack (OFMR) inside the proposed communication room at existing 380kV 9032 & Qassim Power Plant .

d) Concrete encased ductbank shall be a minimum of 2/4/6/12 ducts configuration as per SEC

standard drawing. The 110mm ∅ rigid PVC conduit shall be provided with four (4) 32mm diameter rigid HDPE subduct or SEC approved equivalent. Spare duct/subduct shall be provided with different color of nylon ropes and end plugs.

e) Provide and install communication cable trays, splicing/termination panel, optical fiber

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

4 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


management rack inside the communication room and a minimum of 5 meters long pigtail cables (FC/PC type connector in one end) and splice one end of the pigtail cable with the underground fiber optic cable.

C. COMMUNICATION MANHOLE/HANDHOLES

1. CONTRACTOR shall construct and install Communication Handholes/Manhole, as reference to COMPANY (SEC) Standards drawing numbers TB-800096 (for manhole type-1), TB-800076 (for non-traffic areas), TB-800077 (for traffic areas) and TA-800098 for accessories. Handholes/manhole shall be provided with all necessary clamps and fixing hardware to enable coiling the extra length of fiber optic cable.

2. Manholes/Handholes shall be provided on every, crossing, start and end of duct banks and at every 300 meters (maximum) of continuous run without any change/offset on the ground elevation.

3. Handhole/manhole located in high water table shall be waterproofed as per COMPANY Standard drawing number TA-800140.

4. All interior surfaces of concrete handhole/manhole shall be coated with two (2) coats of elastomeric cementitious impermeable membrane after thirty-five days of concrete placement. The second coat shall be applied within the time interval (between successive coating application) specified by the manufacturer. The total wet film thickness shall not be less than 1 mm (minimum).

5. On Interior Concrete Surfaces: A polymer modified cementitious coating material, when cured, it shall form an elastomeric impermeable membrane:

Color : First coat white and subsequent coats gray Modulus at Break : 1 Mpa Ultimate Elongation : 180 % (1.8 mm crack shall be bridged statically) Tear Resistance : 25 kN/m (ASTM D624) Tensile Set Recovery : 95 % Tensile Strength : 25 Mpa (ASTM D412) Shore ‘A’ Hardness : 85-90 (ASTM D2240) Permeability to water vapor : DIN 1048 Heat Deflection Temperature : ASTM 0648 Bond Strength to Concrete : not less than 1 Mpa Total Solids by Volume : not less than 60 % Total Solids by Weight : not less than 60 % Specific Gravity : not less than 1 Priming Coat : Wet thoroughly the concrete surfaces by water Resistance to Water Surface (DIN 1048) : Positive-7 bar (70m head of water) Crack Accommodation (Static & Dynamic) : Excellent CO2 & Chloride Ion Diffusion Resistance : Excellent Bond to Damp Concrete : Excellent

6. Each Fiber Optic handhole/manhole shall be marked by a COMPANY (SEC) approved stainless

steel marker plate. The Marker plate shall be located on the handhole collar frame with the following information.

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

5 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


SEC FIBER OPTIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

MANHOLE/HANDHOLE NO. : CONTRACT NO. : JOINT BOX NO. : LINK DESTINATION : CABLE TYPE/ NO. OF CORES : CABLE MANUFACTURER : INSTALLATION YEAR :

D. SUBDUCTS

1. Subducts (or equivalent) on straight run installed in the underground duct-bank shall be rigid and must have 32 mm outside diameter and made from HDPE piping compound, its inner wall must be smooth and its pulling length must not exceed 450 meters. It must comply with industry standard ASTM-F-2160, with TRUE-9 – "1 inch Trade size".

2. Subduct (or equivalent) on handholes and inside the building shall be corrugated, flexible and fire retardant (2 hours UL fire rating) with 25 mm outside diameter. Sub-ducts installation shall be in accordance with TCS-T-111.05. Nylon pull ropes ¼ inch diameter (of different color) shall be provided and installed in all vacant duct and subducts.

3. CONTRACTOR shall submit sample of the 25mm corrugated, flexible and 32mm outside diameter rigid HDPE subducts for COMPANY review and acceptance.

4. HDPE couplers and accessories shall be as per industry standard ASTM-F-2176. E. COMMUNICATION PULL BOX

Communication pull box shall be NEMA standard type-4X with 500 mm (H) x 400 mm (W) x 200 mm (D) minimum (unless otherwise specified) and shall be of stainless steel type 304 sheets with opening type cover and shall be marked “COMMUNICATION PULL BOX” with number at the cover. All communications pull box mounted/installed inside and outside the building shall be grounded with a minimum 70mm2 grounding cable with green/yellow insulation. Grounding wire shall be connected to the power plant and substation grounding grid.

F. COMMUNICATION CABLE TRAY/LADDER

1. CONTRACTOR shall supply and install a 12 inches wide telecommunication cable tray with

accessories for Fiber Optic Cable installation and shall be supplied and installed inside communication room/area of the building. Electrical cable trays will not be an acceptable substitute for communication cable tray/ladder.

2. Cable trays and cable ladders shall be primarily constructed of 1.65mm wall rectangular tubing in

high strength alloy, with minimum field strength of 50,000 psi and Cross members with minimum width span of 300mm and shall be welded at 300mm (rung) intervals each along the over-all section/length of the cable tray/ladder. Each over-all section/length shall be finished with telephone gray baked enamel.

3. New cable tray/ladder shall be used to route the proposed U/G non-metallic fiber optic cable

inside COMPANY approved subduct up to the communication room. CONTRACTOR to install

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

6 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


new cable trays/ladders to route the fiber optic cables inside the Substations, where COMPANY requires it.

4. CONTRACTOR shall evaluate and determine the exact quantity required for each site, as part of

his Base design and Detail engineering for the project. G. OPTICAL FIBER MANAGEMENT RACK

At sites where Fiber Optic Splice/Termination Panel is specified, the following technical specifications should be met:

The Fiber Optics Cable Management rack shall be designed to utilize a standard EIA (Electronic Industries Association) 19 Inch rack which will be suitable for mounting splice cassette/splice organizer modules, as well as modules which will terminate fiber optics pigtail and fiber optics patch cable. Each standard EIA 19 inch rack shall be of a height which is consistent with the overall equipment installation at the site (either 2.0 meters, or 2.1 meters high, depending on the installation).

As part of the design of the Fiber Optic Cable management Rack, enclosures will be provided for the housing of splice organizer/splice cassette trays, used to splice incoming fiber optics cable (indoor cable, or underground fiber optics cable) with fiber optics pigtail cables. The enclosure used for this purpose may be either a “pull-out” type design (where a technician will pull out the associated tray of the enclosure from the front access, exposing the inner fiber optics joints), or may be a “swing frame” design (with a left-hand hinge, and a handle on the right side) to allow the access for the splice organizer/splice cassette tray, by “swinging out” the enclosure from the right side handle. Splice organizer trays used in this enclosure shall be sized to hold the splice organizer/splice cassette tray shall be designed with sufficient space, and coiling supports to provide storage of a minimum of five (5) meters of excess fiber optics pigtail cable (48 pigtails).

As part of the design of the Fiber Optic Cable Management Rack, enclosures will be provided for the housing of fiber optics termination connections (FC/PC barrel, or bulkhead connectors) used to interconnect fiber optics pigtail cords with Fiber Optic Patch Cable. Depending on the size of the installation, the enclosures used to house fiber optics termination connections will contain 48 FC/PC connections. The enclosure used for this purpose may be either a “pull-out” type design (where a technician will pull out the associated tray of the enclosure from the front access, exposing the connections between the fiber optics pigtail cables with the fiber optics patch cables), or may be a “swing frame” design (with a left-hand hinge, and a handle on the right side) to allow the access to the interconnection between the fiber optics pigtail cable, and fiber optics patch cable, by “swinging out” the enclosure from the right side handle. Also, the enclosure used to hold the splice organizer/splice cassette tray shall be designed with sufficient space, and coiling supports to provide storage of a minimum of five (5) meters of excess fiber optics pigtail cable (for 36 core fiber connection termination enclosure), and a minimum of five meters of excess fiber optics patch cable (for 48 fiber optics patch cables). FC/PC Fiber Optic Barrel, or Bulkhead connectors used shall allow for no greater than a 1.0-dB/per connection loss, when the connection is used, and shall be designed for use with Single Mode Fiber Optics Cable.

Also, as part of the design/construction of the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack, all accessories required to orderly route incoming underground fiber optic cable, indoor fiber optics cable, as well as fiber optics pigtail cable, and fiber optics patch cable shall be provided. These may include items such as “D” channels, incoming flexible sub-duct, mounting supports (for incoming fiber optics cable), buffer tubes for fiber optics cores (in the enclosure used for splicing), brackets/guides to route fiber optics pigtail/patch cable between portions of the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack, and other accessories which are required as part of the equipment manufacture’s design/construction of the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack.

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

7 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


If the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack is exclusively used for patching and termination of fiber optics pigtail cable, and fiber optics patch cable, the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack shall allow for the termination of a minimum of 108 fibers.

Also the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack shall be provided with required dust proof covers (to prevent fiber optics splices from dust entry) and identification Tags/Labels to identify all incoming fiber optics cables to the cable Management Rack. Prior to the CONTRACTOR supply of the Fiber Optics Cable Management Rack to the COMPANY, the CONTRACTOR shall provide full colored brochures, and equipment specifications for COMPANY review and approval.

1.02 OTHER WORKS TO BE DONE BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. CONTRACTOR shall field verify and determine the exact quantity of all required and necessary

telecommunication civil works (manhole, handhole, cable trays/ladders, pull boxes, conduit risers, grounding & bonding cables and rigid/flexible ducts or sub-ducts) and termination of all cables from the cabinet up to the Main/Intermediate Distribution Frame (MDF/IDF), as part of his Base design and Detailed engineering for the project to completely satisfy the requirements specified in the scope of work.

B. In case the Bidder/Contractor feel that a pre-bid site survey is necessary in order for the

Bidder/Contractor to satisfy himself for all information the Bidder required in preparing the bid documents. The Bidder shall request in writing and submit to COMPANY representative to schedule and arrange for a group site visit with all bidders. Otherwise, COMPANY (SEC) will assumed that Bidder/Contractor fully understand the Communication SOW/TS requirements of the PTS covering SEC Fiber Optic Systems and interconnection with other telecommunication systems of the COMPANY.

C. End to End testing of the complete fiber optic cables (U/G to OFMR) after all installations and

splicing are completed. D. CONTRACTOR shall plan & execute the WORK such that the communication outages required

to the existing transmission lines are minimized to the extent possible. A detailed plan for the execution of WORK shall be submitted in the Base design stage for COMPANY (SEC) review and approval.

E. Copies of existing Substation drawings and other information as deemed appropriate by the

COMPANY may be provided to the CONTRACTOR upon request, if available. However, if such information is not available, then the CONTRACTOR should be responsible for the independent development of the information required to complete the Base design & Detail drawings as specified for the PROJECT.

1.03 REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED CABLES

A. If during any testing of the fiber optics cable there was damage or defects found, CONTRACTOR shall be required to replace the entire drum section of the fiber optic cable at NO additional cost to the COMPANY, and without impact on the overall project schedule.

B. The final installation, to be provided by the CONTRACTOR, shall be safe, functional and reliable in accordance with the latest Engineering practices. End to end testing of the complete fiber optic cable after all splicing are completed.

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

8 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


1.04 SPECIFIC SEC STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. SEC MATERIAL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

01-TMSS-01 General Requirements for All Equipment/Materials 48-TMSS-02R.1 Non-Metallic Fiber Optic Cable (NFOC)

23-TMSS-01 PVC conduits & fittings for underground Cables 23-TMSS-02 Duct sealing units

B. SEC ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

SES-T-011 Symbols, Communications TCS-T-111.06 Optical Fiber Cables Splicing TCS-T-557.10 Optical Fiber Cables Testing/Acceptance TCS-T-111.08 Underground Installation of Optical Fiber Cables

TCS-T-111.11 Design and Installation of Communication Conduit and

Manhole System TCS-T-111.02 Underground Cable Conduit Sealing

C. SEC ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

SES-T-011 Symbols, Communications

TCS-T-111.11 Design & Installation of U/G communications conduit & manhole systems

TCS-T-557.10 Optical Fiber Cables Testing/Acceptance TCS-T-111.08 Underground Installation of Optical Fiber Cables

TCS-T-111.02 Underground Cable Conduit Sealing TES-T-111.02 Communication Facility grounding D. SEC STANDARD DRAWINGS (Latest revision shall prevail)

SEEDS-II R.1 Preparing, Processing, & Managing Transmission For Contractor TA-800098 Manhole/Handhole Accessories for Communication (sht. 1 & 2)

TA-800140 Handhole/Manhole Water Proofing Installation

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

9 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


TA-800094 Typical Duct Splaying Layout for Manhole (Service Hole and Hanhole) Entry.

TA-800096 Service Manhole Type-1

TA-800078 Typical Detail of Conduit Mounting on the Gantry Structure for Non-

Metallic Fiber Optic Cables

TB-800069 Standard Trench Detail Joint Communication & Power Cables

TB-800077 Standard Pre-Cast Handhole for Communication for Traffic Areas

TB-800076 Standard Pre-Cast Handhole for Communication for Non-Traffic Areas (Latest Revision)

TES-T-111.02 Communication Facility Grounding TB-800079 PVC Conduit Installation Concrete Encased (Vital)

**** END OF SECTION 1 ****

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

10 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


SECTION 2- MATERIALS 2.01 OPTICAL FIBER CABLES A. UNDERGROUND NON-METALLIC FIBER OPTIC CABLE (UGNMFOC) 1. Non-Metallic Underground Optical Fiber Cable shall meet all the requirements and latest

revision of COMPANY Material Standard Specifications 48-TMSS-02. 2. CONTRACTOR shall submit his proposal along with Technical Specification and

representative sample of the cable to the COMPANY (SEC) for review and approval prior to manufacturing the cable.

3. All types of the Optical Fiber Cables shall be compatible with each other. CONTRACTOR and the cable manufacturer shall guarantee that the Fibers of each Cable Drum supplied to the COMPANY have matching parameters to enable good optical splices within COMPANY specified maximum allowable optical splice loss limit.

4. Color-coding and grouping of the fiber optic cores and tubes/binders shall be as per COMPANY Material Standard Specification 48-TMSS-02 latest revision.

2.02 FIBER OPTICS JOINT BOXES ( if applicable ) A. UNDERGROUND TYPE 4-WAY JOINT BOX (OPGW – UGNFOC)

This type of Joint Box will be used, as necessary & as required by COMPANY in locations such as Gantry or Terminal Compound and Underground Handholes/Manholes (where CONTRACTOR will route underground cable) where cables Optical Fiber Ground Wire (OPGW) and Underground Fiber Optics cables (UGNFOC) will be joined. Notes applicable to all Joint Boxes – Splicing, Tagging & Labeling All splice cassettes/trays shall be supplied and installed inside this type of joint box, as well as all other accessories for splicing the fiber optics cables. The take-off structure type, Underground type & Mid-Span type Joint Box shall have a grounding connection for tying the box to an external ground.

During the installation of all Joint Boxes – Tags/labels shall be provided for each joint box, which shall contain the following information.

SEC FIBER OPTIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM CONTRACT NO. : CMH/CHH NO./STRUCTURE NO : JOINT BOX NO. : LINK DESTINATION : CABLE TYPE/ NO. OF CORES : CABLE MANUFACTURER : INSTALLATION YEAR :

For outdoor type Joint Boxes, the tagging/labeling shall be provided and installed on a permanently affixed COMPANY approved stainless steel tag whose size, lettering, and location shall be easily readable from personnel on the ground, and shall use embossed letters to allow for ease of reading. For underground type joint boxes (as required by COMPANY), the tagging/labeling shall be

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

11 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


provided and installed on a permanently affixed COMPANY approved stainless steel tag, or plastic tag whose size, lettering, and location shall be easily readable from personnel on the ground, and shall use embossed letters to allow for ease of reading. For all joint box tags, a sample of each tag shall be submitted for COMPANY review and comment before manufacture of each tag. Other Notes applicable to all Joint Boxes

As a part of submittals provided by the CONTRACTOR, type test data and materials brochures shall be supplied by clearly identifying the type of fiber optics joint boxes, which are to be supplied. This data shall include (but not be limited to the following): a. Crush Resistance, static load b. Impact Resistance, chemical resistance test c. Dimensions and mounting details of the Joint Box d. Inside dimensions, and details for mounting of all accessories e. Water tightness and temperature cycling test of the Joint Box f. Grounding Details of the Joint Box g. Accessories list, including details of splice cassettes, and trays, mounting hardware and

accommodate looping of excess fiber optics cable Each Fiber Optics Joint Box which is to be supplied shall be able to coil an additional 10 meters of fiber optic cores inside the joint box, other than the fiber optics cores which are to be contained inside the Splice Cassette tray. The box shall be designed with retainers to allow for coiling of these excess fiber optics cores. The Joint Box shall consist of the following components: a. Gasket (Seal) b. Hinged or Bolted down c. Optical Fiber Splice kit d. Mounting Hardware e. Tray for Splice (Organizer) to hold a maximum six (6) splices per tray and 2 meters long

of each fiber f. Accessories required to produce and protect permanent joint g. Fiber Protection Sleeves (minimum 48) h. Each joint box shall be capable of being hermetically re-sealed each time it is opened The joint box shall provide environmental and mechanical protection to the fiber optic splices, and unused cable entry ports shall be sealed to allow for future use. The metallic parts shall be resistant against general causes (i.e. stress, corrosion, pitting, etc). Dissimilar metals when used to support the boxes shall not cause galvanic corrosion effects on the closure body.


DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

12 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


SECTION 3- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATIONS A. General Requirements for Both Types of Fiber Optic Cables:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide the COMPANY complete description/specification/data and representative samples of all types of the cables for COMPANY review and approval prior to manufacturing the cables.

2. The total length of the cables shall be determined by taking into consideration sag, number

of joint boxes, extra length of cable coiled on the transmission line structure, communication room and at each joint box location inside the manholes/hand holes, etc.

3. CONTRACTOR shall optimize the cable reel lengths in order to minimize the cable splices. 4. CONTRACTOR and cable manufacturer shall ensure that fibers of all cable drums have

matching parameters so that the optical splices are within allowable splice loss limit. 5. The fibers of all optical fiber cables shall be compatible with each other.

B. Underground Non Metallic Fiber Optic Cable (UGNMFOC):

1. The UGNFOC shall be installed independently inside a rigid subducts in dedicated duct banks and corrugated, flexible and fire-rated subducts inside the communication room, handholes/manholes and routed up to the communication room in accordance with the COMPANY Construction Standard TCS-T-111.08. The UGNFOC shall be coiled (minimum of 25 meters) near the communication equipment inside the communication room in accordance with the COMPANY Communication Standard requirements and shall meet all the requirements of COMPANY Materials Specification 48-TMSS-02 and cable Manufacturer recommendations.

2. Sufficient extra length (at least 15 meters) of the UGNMFOC shall be securely and carefully coiled inside the start/end manholes & handholes for future splice requirements. All other locations of handholes shall be provided with an extra two coils of at least 5 meters of UGNMFOC.

3. The cables shall be supplied with approved end seals (waterproof), which shall not be removed until immediately prior to Optic jointing. CONTRACTOR shall field verify on site to determine/measure the length of Fiber Optic Cables that are required in this project before any cutting or pulling of cables to be done.

4. All necessary and required telecommunication cable trays, cable ladders, raceways, pipes, conduits and all accessories shall be provided and installed by CONTACTOR to route the optical fiber cable and other communication cables from their designated ends up to the location of communication equipment.

5. Also, the part of the optical fiber cable inside the substation shall be installed far enough from power cables in order to avoid any risk of being damaged due to power faults and shall enter directly to telecommunication room without passing through substation basement.

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

13 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


3.02 INSTALLATION OF FIBER OPTIC JOINT BOXES ( if applicable ) A. Optical Fiber Cable Joint Boxes 1. OPGW-UGNMFOC (4 ways) At Substation Gantry structure, the joint boxes shall be installed in accordance with

COMPANY Standard drawing TA-800078 at a height of 3 meters above ground level. A liquid tight PVC coated flexible metal conduit (25mm Ø) shall be installed between the joint box cable entry and the 50mm Ø PVC coated steel conduit. The conduit shall be sealed at both ends.

2. Use “weather tight connectors” connecting the flexible metal conduit with the optical fiber joint box and with the galvanized steel pipe (GSP). CONTRACTOR shall submit details including colored brochures of the recommended joint boxes for COMPANY approval. CONTRACTOR shall not procure any joint box until reviewed and approved by the COMPANY.

B. Fiber Optics Splicing Requirements

1. All splices shall be done by qualified and experienced optical fiber cable splices. CONTRACTOR shall submit qualification documents of the proposed optical cable splicer for COMPANY review and approval.

2. All splices shall be fusion type using splicing machine with built-in estimated splice loss measurement and video recording capabilities.

3. Optical attenuation of fiber splices estimated by the Fusion Splice Machine shall not exceed 0.05 dB per splice.

4. All optical fiber cable splice shall be measured from both ends using Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) and Optical Test Sets. Splice loss measurements carried-out on both directions and average the values shall not exceed the COMPANY splice loss limit of 0.05dB.

5. All optical fiber splicing and testing activities shall be in accordance with COMPANY Standards TCS-T-111.06 and TCS-T-111.10. All equipment shall be calibrated. Calibration certificates must be submitted to the COMPANY for review and acceptance prior to splicing and testing activities.

6. All splicing activities shall be done in the presence of the COMPANY representative. When witnessing of the splicing activities by the COMPANY representative is not possible, the COMPANY at its option may allow the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the splicing, provided that the whole activities are recorded on video tape and submitted to the COMPANY, along with the tabulated results, review and acceptance. CONTRACTOR shall provide the video machine and videotapes.


DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

14 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


SECTION 4- TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 4.01 ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR TESTING OF FIBER

OPTIC CABLES A. Factory Test of Fiber Optic Cables:

1. The factory tests shall confirm the following:

a) All materials satisfy the requirements of this specification and all further requirements to guarantee a complete working system.

b) All materials meet the performance requirements under the local ambient conditions given in this specification.

2. COMPANY or its designated representative may witness any or all factory tests performed. 3. All fiber optic cables are required to be subjected to factory tests as per the following

procedure: a) A minimum of one-month notice shall be given by the CONTRACTOR of his readiness

to start the factory tests. b) The Factory and Inspection and Test of the OPGW and non-metallic fiber optic cables

shall be conducted as per the following program: i) The test shall be based on the guidelines mentioned in COMPANY Material

Standard Specification 48-TMSS-02 latest revision in accordance with the test procedures and test standards referred to in the standard. The Inspector of the Independent Inspection Agency (IIA) shall review test data of the source fibers (from the manufacturers). All test results of the finished cables shall be reviewed by the Inspector of the IIA to verify compliance with the requirements of this project. Additionally, specific tests shall be repeated in the presence of the IIA Inspector.

ii) The following routine tests for the completed fiber optics cable shall be witnessed by the COMPANY approved Independent (Third Party) Inspection Agency: 1) Optical Attenuation Test at 1310nm/1550nm/ (and 1383 nm for G.652.D and

1625nm for G.655) (by OTDR) - 100 percent of supplied cable for Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted (NZDSF) and Low Water Peak Dispersion Unshifted (DUSMF) (ITU-T G.655 and ITU-T-G.652.D) Fiber.

2) Fiber Point Defects Test at 1310nm/1550nm/ (and 1383 nm for G.652.D and 1625nm for G.655) (by OTDR) - 100 percent of supplied cable for Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted (NZDSF) and Low Water Peak Dispersion Unshifted (DUSMF) (ITU-T G.655 and ITU-T-G.652.D) Fiber.

3) Chromatic Dispersion Test (CD) – 100 percent of supplied cable for Non-Zero Dispersion shifted (ITU-T G.655) Fiber and 20 percent of supplied Low Water Peak Dispersion Unshifted (ITU-T-652.D) Fiber randomly chosen by Third Party Inspector.

4) Polarization Modal Dispersion Test (PMD) – 100 percent of supplied cable for Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted (ITU-T G.655) Fiber and 20 percent of

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

15 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


supplied Low Water Peak Dispersion Unshifted (ITU-T-652.D) Fiber randomly chosen by Third Party Inspector.

5) The following information shall be included on each Test Results/Data sheet pertaining to the test witnessed by of data sheets reviewed by the Independent (Third Party) Inspection Agency Inspector: a) Name and signature of the manufacturer’s QA/QC person. b) Name and Official Stamp of the Independent (Third Party) Inspection

Agency Inspector. c) Name and signature of the Inspector along with the following

information. d) Date of witnessing/reviewing of the routine Tests/tests Data Sheets. e) For tests witnessed by the Independent (Third Party) Inspector, the

words “Witnessed by (Name of Inspector)” for each test witnessed. For Tests Results/Data reviewed by the Independent (Third Party) Inspector, the words “Reviewed by (Name of Inspector)” for each tests result reviewed.

6) Upon successful completion of all tests, the original and three (3) copies of the formal Inspection report/certificate containing the following documents as attachments, (with the attachments indicated as “Annexure to Inspection certificate/report No.”) shall be sent directly to the COMPANY for review: a) Fiber and Cable Manufacturer’s Test Data Sheets reviewed by the IIA

Inspector. b) Results of Attenuation tests witnessed by the IIA Inspector. c) Results of the fiber chromatic Dispersion test witnessed by the IIA

Inspector. d) OTDR traces of attenuation and fiber Point defect witnessed by the IIA

Inspector. 7) References should be made in the Inspection Certificate/report of the tests

witnessed and Test Data Sheets reviewed as part of the inspection activities.

8) All documents attached with the report shall bear the IIA Inspection certificate/Report No. with which these are attached.

9) A copy of the report and all attachments shall be sent to the CONTRACTOR, which shall be retained by the CONTRACTOR throughout the warranty period.

10) The manufacturer shall export pack all the cables for shipment after the Test Report is reviewed and accepted by the COMPANY.

B. Field Test of Fiber Optic Cables:

CONTRACTOR shall perform the optical fiber tests using 1310/1550/(and 1383 nm for G.652.D and 1625nm for G.655) Optical Fiber Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) Optical Light sources and optical power meters as necessary, to measure and document the optical fiber attenuations at 1310/1550/ (and 1383 nm for G.652.D and 1625nm for G.655) wavelengths. Each Optical Fiber connection loss (e.g., pigtail to jumper cable) shall be less than 1.0dB per connection.

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

16 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


1. Pre-Installation (Drum) Test CONTRACTOR shall test the Communications Cables on the drums/Reels prior to installation to confirm that the cable was not damaged during shipment. Attenuation and Fiber Point’s Defects tests shall be performed at this stage by OTDR.

2. Post Installation Test With each cable length in its final installed condition with all clamps and other accessories attached, CONTRACTOR shall test the Communications Cable for Attenuation and Fiber Point’s Defects tests at this stage by OTDR.

3. Witnessing Fiber Optics Splicing COMPANY Representative shall witness all Fiber Optic splicing activity performed by the CONTRACTOR. In cases where COMPANY Representative cannot directly witness the Fiber Optic cable splicing activity, COMPANY at its option will require CONTRACTOR to provide a “Videotaped” record (from the Video output of the CONTRACTOR splicing machine recorded on VHS Videotape) for later review and decision by the COMPANY communication personnel for each videotaped splicing record. CONTRACTOR shall provide a viewing guide, which contains an accurate representation at splices contained on the Videotape.

4. End-to-End Test After completion of all Communications Cable splicing and mounting of all joint housings and termination in their final positions, End-to-End (continuity) Test shall be done by CONTRACTOR. Attenuation and fiber points defects tests shall be performed at this stage by OTDR (form both ends of the cable) as well as End-to-End loss characteristics verified by Optical Light Source and Power Meter at 1310/1550/(and 1383 nm for G.652.D and 1625nm for G.655) wavelengths. Polarization Modal Dispersion (PMD) Test and Chromatic Dispersion (CD) Test of the completed/installed fiber optic cables (both Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted (ITU-T G.655) and Low Water Peak Dispersion Unshifted Single Mode Fiber (ITU-T-652.D)) shall be performed by the Contractor.

5. The commissioning and site testing shall be done in strict compliance with the COMPANY WORK schedules as much as possible. If any of the three (3) stages the test results for any fiber that do not comply with the COMPANY requirements or the approved factory field test results, then the CONTRACTOR shall replace the relevant drum section of the cable at no additional cost to the COMPANY and without impact on the overall project schedule.

C. Preparation for Acceptance Test and Inspection

CONTRACTOR shall complete all mechanical WORKS, pre-electrical/communication test and pre-final documentation consisting of marked-up construction drawings, pre-commissioning test results, and system and equipment manuals before inviting COMPANY representatives for commissioning tests and inspection.

D. Scheduling Commissioning Tests and Inspection

1. All testing and commissioning activities shall be coordinated with and witnessed by the COMPANY representative.

2. CONTRACTOR's invitation to the COMPANY to witness commissioning tests and inspection shall be made fourteen (14) days in advance accompanied by: a. Marked-up Construction Drawings

DRAWN BY: MAL DATE:

CHK’D BY: MAL

APPROVED

TE&SA DEPT.

MAL

OPERATING DEPT.

CERTIFIED

BY: FSM

REVISIONS



380 KV SUBSTATION

RIYADH SAUDI ARABIA

C640


NO

.

3 2 1

DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’D 0A

PP’D

C

ER

T.

17 OF 17


National Grid SA

0


b. Pre-Commissioning Test Results c. System/equipment Manuals

E. Test and Inspection Checklist

CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the COMPANY a communication checklist of acceptance tests and inspection covering documentation, mechanical, and inventory and tests requirements for PROJECT acceptance. (For Fiber Optic Cable, the COMPANY's "Fiber Optic Cable Acceptance Test and Inspection Checklist, FOC-TIC-001" form shall be used).

F. Calibration of Test Equipment

All test equipment to be used in the acceptance tests shall be calibrated to standards traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. Calibration certificates shall be submitted to the COMPANY for review and acceptance.

G. Correction of Discrepancies

A re-inspection and re-test to be witnessed by the COMPANY representative is required to clear the CONTRACTOR of any discrepancy found during the commissioning test and inspection. A re-test and re-inspection of related parameters shall also be conducted to ensure that these are not affected by aforementioned discrepancy.

H. Order of Acceptance Test and Inspection Related Activities

Various stages of acceptance test and inspection shall be performed according to the following order: 1. Scheduling of test and inspection by the CONTRACTOR, the date to be agreed upon by

both COMPANY and CONTRACTOR and submission by the CONTRACTOR and approval by the COMPANY of documents mentioned above.

2. Validation of marked-up construction drawing (done throughout the test and inspection process).

3. Inventory and mechanical inspection of installed equipment. 4. Verification of validity of test equipment to be used in the test. 5. Performance and/or functional tests after stage 4 is complied with and any service

affecting discrepancy found in stage 3 above is corrected. Unavailability of documents essential in the safe energization, operation and trouble shooting of the installation is considered service-affecting discrepancy.

6. Signing of Technical Completion of the Project after all stated stages are complied with and accepted.

7. Trial period of one (1) month after clearing all outstanding discrepancies and acceptance of the final test results.

8. Signing of Preliminary Acceptance of the Project after successful completion of the trial period.

*** END OF SECTION 4 ***

LEGEND

U/G Fiber Optic Cable (Proposed)

OFMR/FSTP ( Proposed)OFMR/FSTP

Qassim Power Plant S/S 9032

OFMR : Optical Fiber Management Rack

FSTP : Fiber Splice Termination Panel

NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM IS TENTATIVE, THE FINAL DIAGRAM SHALL BE GENERATED DURING DETAILED DESIGN

Approx. Route Length = 1 KM

Approx. Route Length = 1 KMOFMR/FSTP OFMR/FSTP

Approx. Route Length = 1 KM

FIBER OPTIC SYS. LAYOUT FOR S/S 9030 – Hail PP

CS 0966/R 0

National Grid الشركة الوطنية لنقل الكهرباء

Fiber Optic System Overview (Required)

CS-0966/Rev.0

Drawn: ML

Check.:

Approve.: FSK

Date: Oct. 2012

Sheet # 1 of 1

Rev. 0

Diagram # SC/P/A4/OLS/ 9032 – Qassim PP

Management Spools

Vertical cable-guide (runway) for Patch Cords,

48x13 patch cords

Cable trunking for Pigtails/fiber jumpers, 48x13

pigtails/fiber jumpers

OFMR/FDM LAYOUT

119

Management Spools (48x13 patch cords)

9

7

5

3

0

3

1

22

4

6

8

12

8

10

Horizontal through (48x13 patch cords)

Cable glands“30”

Sub-trunking for fiber jumpers coming from

equip. (3-pipes)

APPENDIX - VII

PROTECTION SYSTEM

REQUIREMENTS

(BY OTHER CONTRACTOR)

APPENDIX- VIII

CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY الشرآة السعودية للكهرباء



DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.

C640 A APPENDIX VIII PTS 12CC348

1 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK, MATERIALS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 380KV CABLE LINE FROM GT AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS AT QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION QASSIM SAUDI ARABIA

REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1

PREPARED BY KZ DATE: CHK’D BY: THM APPROVED

BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK,MATERIALS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

CONSTRUCTION OF 380KV CABLE LINE FROM GT AT QASSIM POWER PLANT TO GIS

AT QASSIM-4 (9032) 380KV SUBSTATION

FINAL

PTS-12CC348

(ATTACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B” OF CONTRACT NO. #####/00)




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


2 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION Page I CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS 1.01 GENERAL 3 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 3 1.03 STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS 5

II DESIGN CRITERIA 2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS 6 2.02 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENTS, CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS 6

III MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 GENERAL 7 3.02 CONCRETE 7 3.03 CONCRET ENCASED DUCT BANKS AND HAND HOLES 10 3.04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 11 3.05 REINFORCING STEEL 13 3.06 WATER PROOFING MEMBRANE 13 3.07 BACK FILL MATERIALS 15 3.08 LINK BOX PITS/BARRICADES 16 3.09 LINK BOX PITS 16 3.10 LINK BOX FOUNDATIONS 16 3.11 DUCT SEALING UNITS 16

IV INSTALLATIN REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES 4.01 GENERAL 17 4.02 CABLE TUNNEL REQUIREMENTS 17 4.03 CABLE DUCTBANKS 18 4.04 THRUST BORING 19 4.05 REINSTATEMENT OF PAVEMENT SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE 19 4.06 ASPHALT REINSTATEMENT 19 4.07 OTHER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 21

Attachment:

1. Drawing Number TA-800062 - Typical Ductbank Sections Concrete Ductbank110kV to 380Kv

2. Drawing Number TA-800063 - Highway Under Crossing for 110kV to 380kV U/G Power Cables by Thrust Boring




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


3 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

SECTION I – CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK

1.01 GENERAL This PROJECT will provide 380kV Cable line from GT at Qassim Power Plant to

GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380 kV Substation, along with Fiber Optic Cables with necessary Cable tunnels, duct banks, hand holes as applicable for Control Cables, Fiber Optic Cables as well as for Non-metallic Fiber Optic Cable Works.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

This PROJECT shall be carried out on Lump Sum Turnkey basis. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the design, manufacture/procure, supply and deliver all equipment and materials, construction, commissioning, SITE testing and provide other related services for the completion of this PROJECT in accordance with the requirements of this Scope of WORK and Technical Specifications.

On Lump Sum Turnkey basis the CONTRACTOR shall provide and construct the following items:

1. Soil investigation and analysis shall be performed (If required) as per

requirements mentioned in Appendix XVI. Contractor should obtain a clarification in this regard during pre-bid stage.

2. Route survey of the proposed 380kV Cable Line indicating all the details of the

PROJECT and all the existing systems/facilities that shall be affected along the route.

3. Complete survey and investigation for the whole route of the proposed Cable

Line (380kV Cable line from GT at Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380 kV Substation). All existing utilities found including SEC-COA 380kV, 132kV or 13.8kV Cables shall be surveyed with complete details and reflected in the Design/Construction drawings.

4. Construction of cable tunnels from GT at Qassim Power Plant to GIS at Qassim-4 (9032) 380 kV Substation as shown in conceptual drawing # CT-906045 and requirements mentioned hereunder: A. Contractor shall design and construct cable tunnels as shown in the

drawing.

B. CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of the cable tunnels and shall size them adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: cable ampacity, space for maintenance and operations, all future piping to be installed and all the cables installation in this PROJECT.

C. Cable tunnels adjacent to the buildings shall meet all the requirements of

TES-P-119.19. Emergency exits shall be per TES-P-119.19. Cable tunnel waterproofing shall be per TES-P-119.19. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable tunnels shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with pipe railings shall be provided at the emergency exits to allow exit from the cable tunnel or entrance to cable tunnel from the substation yard.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


4 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

The floor slab of the cable tunnel shall be sloped towards the drainage sump pit at 0.5% slope with the use of cement screed. A minimum of two (2) sump pits shall be provided. The size of the sump pits shall be 600x600x400mm.

D. Cable tunnels shall be properly ventilated.

5. Contractor shall provided duct banks and handholes/trenches for laying all

Fiber Optic Cables/Multicore Cables/LV Cables as required for Protection, Communication, SCADA, SOE, DSM, SAS etc., in between GT (Generation Transformers), Transmission room in Power Plant and Substation 9032 Control Room, as per respective appendices.

6. Design and construction of reinforced concrete underground pits with suitable

manholes and foundations for link boxes.

7. Material testing and documentation of the results.

8. Reinstatement of affected existing facilities such as asphalt, curbs, medians, plants, landscape, etc., shall be reinstated to the satisfaction of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and agencies/authorities involved.

9. Excavation and, if necessary, dewatering, shuttering of the cable tunnels as

well as the preparation of the cable ducts and supporting structures for the installation of the cables.

10. Provide access by providing suitable bridges for pedestrians and vehicular

traffic during excavation in built-up areas. The COMPANY shall not be responsible for any result of accidents due to construction of this access.

11. All traffic diversions shall be made and maintained for the safe completion of

the PROJECT, including all necessary barricades, warning lights and traffic signs as governed by the Traffic Police, when road cutting is warranted.

12. Procurement, inspection and testing of equipment/materials.

13. Transportation and delivery of equipment/materials to and within Saudi Arabia

and WORK SITES.

14. Preparation of WORK SITES, construction and installation of equipment, materials and allied facilities.

15. Provide construction camp facilities for the workforce, with storage yard or

warehouse for construction materials and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all equipment and materials under his custody.

16. Inspection, checking out (including phasing out), commissioning and SITE

testing of all constructed and installed equipment, and their allied facilities.

17. The whole width of the roads of the specified cable route shall be thoroughly investigated and surveyed. All utilities found shall be reflected in the design drawings.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


5 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

18. All dismantled materials/equipment, if any, shall be turned over to the

COMPANY designated warehouse.

Note: The Bidder/CONTRACTOR shall visit/survey the Cable routes and make himself aware of the details of the PROJECT and all the existing systems/facilities along the routes.

1.03 STANDARD, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS

All WORK equipment and materials covered by this document shall conform to the latest edition of the COMPANY'S Material Standard Specifications supplemented with latest applicable Standards, Codes and Specifications. The latest edition of each Standard and Specifications shall mean the latest edition specified hereunder. The CONTRACTOR may propose "equivalent" Standards and Specifications if such Standards and Specifications are in fact equal or better than those specified herein, and shall be subject to prior approval of the COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with the following Standards, Codes and Specifications, and no deviation shall be accepted unless otherwise supported by a written waiver from the COMPANY. Refer to Clause 3.06 of the main PTS for all applicable Standards, Codes and Specifications.

*** END OF SECTION I ***




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


6 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

SECTION II – DESIGN CRITERIA 2.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS Design the cable tunnels/ductbanks in accordance with ACI 318M-08 using

AASHTO HS 20 truck load.

2.02 PROJECT DESIGN DOCUMENTS, CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS The CONTRACTOR shall submit all design documents, calculations, studies and

drawings at various stages of the PROJECT as per Table 3.01 of the main PTS for all civil related items.

**** END OF SECTION II ****




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


7 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

SECTION III – MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

3.01 GENERAL

This section provides the technical specifications of the following major equipments and materials:

1. Concrete 2. Asphalt Concrete Pavement 3. Reinforcing Steel 4. Backfill Materials 5. Link box pits/barricades 6. Link box foundations

The technical specifications of materials are provided hereunder.

3.02 CONCRETE A. All concrete shall conform to COMPANY Materials Standard Specification

70-TMSS-03, Rev.0. B. Concrete exposure shall be based on the results of the soil investigation analysis.

C. A minimum 100mm thick lean concrete shall be provided under the bottom part of

every reinforced concrete member in contact with the soil. D. Provide two (2) layers of 150 microns polyethylene film as protection to bottom

surfaces of concrete. Polyethylene membranes shall be laid, lapped and sealed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. The polyethylene film shall be at the interface of the foundation concrete and lean concrete.

E. All concrete directly in contact with the ground shall be applied with the following

protective coating:

1. Surfaces below Grade

a) Below grade surfaces of concrete shall be coated with two (2) coats of coal tar epoxy after thirty-five (35) days of concrete placement. The second coat shall be applied not less than one (1) day after the first coat application. The total dry film thickness shall not be less than 0.60mm (minimum).

b) The concrete shall be clean and dry at the time of coating application.

Other requirements of surface preparation, as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be followed.

2. Surfaces above Grade

a) After a minimum of thirty-five (35) days of concrete placement, all

exposed foundation concrete surfaces (above grade) shall be coated with an elastomeric waterproofing material (the material shall be elastomeric polyurethane, aluminum color). 300mm of the concrete




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


8 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

surface below grade shall also be coated with the same material after curing of the coal tar epoxy coating. The minimum dry film thickness of elastomeric coating shall be 1 mm.

b) Concrete shall be clean and dry at the time of coating application.

c) Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed regarding

the surface preparation and coating application.

F. Concrete Formwork

Formwork shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ACI-347. All forms shall be substantially and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, and properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape that produces result in a final structure conforming to size, shape and dimensions of the member as required or shown on the drawings. Form surfaces shall be clean, smooth and sufficiently hard to produce smooth, hard and uniform texture on the concrete.

G. Ties and Anchors

All ties, braces, anchors and other miscellaneous metal or plastic accessories shall be securely and properly placed and tied, so that they will not be dislodged during the pouring operation and will be embedded at the depths and positions specified. Gage of the wire shall be a minimum of no. 16 USG.

H. Concrete Tests

Tests on concrete, aggregates and mixing water shall be as per 70-TMSS-03, Rev.0. All test results shall be submitted to the COMPANY for review and approval as the tests are completed.

The results of these tests shall be systematically filed with descriptions of where the batch was used. Copies of all test results shall be handed over to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for review and comments.

All test reports and records should be systematically organized, clearly marked, boxed, and when the construction WORK is completed, they should be turned over to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for incorporation into the COMPANY'S permanent records.

In the event that concrete fails to meet strength requirements, in-place testing for concrete strength shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR while under supervision of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE at no additional cost to the COMPANY.

In-place testing will be conducted by one (1) or a combination of the following methods:

1. ASTM C42, "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed

Means of Concrete"

2. ASTM C803, "Test Penetrating Resistance on Hardened Concrete"

3. ASTM C805, "Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete"




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


9 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

Concrete in the area represented by in-place test shall be considered structurally adequate provided such results conform to the provisions of ACI 318M-08.

The COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE reserves the right to require additional cylinders be taken whenever there is just cause, such as a change in batching procedures, a change in concrete materials, breaking of batching, delay in transport or placement, code violation and the like at no additional cost to the COMPANY.

Concrete subject to severe exposure condition shall be tested for chloride permeability test.

I. Curinq

All concrete shall be cured with concrete mix quality water (potable) in accordance with recommendations of ACI 305 and ACI 308 and as specified below:

1. Pond Curing: Ponding shall comprise of at least 40mm deep potable water covering the

entire surface of the concrete. The water shall be replenished when less than 50mm deep to assure that 40mm minimum depth required is retained.

2. Wet Burlap Curing: Wet burlap curing shall comprise at least two (2) layers of constantly damped

burlap laid tight against the pre-soaked concrete surface. The burlap shall be kept uniformly damp so that lighter patches or drier burlap are not evident by a clock valve controlled soil soaker hose supplied with water at adequate pressure.

3. Membrane Curing: Membrane curing shall not be applied to concrete mixes containing pozzolan.

Whenever used, membrane curing shall be preceded by saturation of concrete with sprayed water. This water shall be sealed against the concrete by application of a white (reflective) curing membrane in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. All concrete shall be cured for at least seven (7) days except as specified

below:

Unreinforced Massive Concrete : 14 days Concrete Blended with Pozzolan : 21 days

5. Water for curing shall meet the following requirements:

Total Dissolved Solids : 500 PPM (maximum) CI + SO4 Chlorides and Sulfates : 300 PPM (Maximum) pH Value : 7.0 (minimum); 8.5 (maximum)

J. Minimum concrete cover over all reinforcements at and below ground level shall be

85 mm. All other concrete cover requirements shall be as per ACI 318M-08, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary."

K. The CONTRACTOR shall not place any concrete until the excavations and/or forms

and embedded items are inspected by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


10 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

This inspection will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility of keeping the holes in acceptable condition until placement of concrete is completed nor for the accurate placement of embedded items. The placing of concrete shall be accomplished in such a manner as to prevent segregation of the aggregates.

3.03 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTBANKS AND HANDHOLES A. CONTRACTOR shall construct concrete encased ductbanks in accordance with

COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800062. Spare circuit conduits shall always be provided as required. All cable duct installations shall follow the requirements of the COMPANY Construction Standard TCS-P-104.03. Construction of concrete encased conduits for communication shall be in accordance with Detail 1 of the COMPANY Standard Drawing TB-800079.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide/construct ductbanks system with PVC pipes,

flexible sub ducts, and handholes to route the underground optical fiber cable up to the interface points.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall design and install all necessary ductbanks for Non-Metallic

Underground Fiber Optic Cables for the entire cable route. The exact routing of the ductbank shall be proposed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the COMPANY during the base design phase of the project.

D. Communication ductbanks shall consist of a minimum of 2 x 100 mm dia. PVC

conduits. All COMPANY Construction Standards with respect to Civil Works shall be followed. One of the communication conduits shall be provided with four (4) 32 mm dia. rigid PVC sub ducts. The other conduit shall remain vacant. All unused conduits and sub ducts shall be provided with different colored pull ropes and end plugs.

E. All structural design calculations shall be submitted together with all drawings to the

COMPANY for review and comments. F. Excavation and Backfilling shall conform to the COMPANY Construction

Specification for Eearthworks, TCS-Q-113.02. No backfilling shall be performed before the structure has been inspected and approved by the COMPANY representative.

G. All forms shall be unyielding and tight jointed to produce hardened concrete of high

quality. Formwork shall conform to ACI-374. H. All conduits installed shall be tested by mandrel of appropriate size, in the presence

of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and the ends sealed. I. For Communication ductbank configuration, requirements and details refer to

COMPANY Drawing Nos. TB-800079, SB-036367 and TB-800090. J. The CONTRACTOR shall design the manhole/handhole of sufficient strength for the

duty they will be subjected to (i.e. equipment, vehicle, and water and earth pressure). Manholes/handholes shall continuously be free of water and provided with pulling eyes, sump, ladder rungs and all other necessary items. Other Waterproofing requirements of the handholes shall be in accordance with Company Standard Drawing No. TA-800098.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


11 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

K. Communication handholes shall be provided at every change of direction along the

proposed route, crossing, start and end of ductbanks and at every 300 meters of continuous run.

L. For the design of the Fiber Optic Communication cable handhole details, refer to

COMPANY Drawing TB-800076, for non-traffic areas and Drawing No. TB-800077, for traffic areas.

M. Each fiber optic cable handhole shall be marked with a stainless steel marker plate,

with the following information:

SEC-COA FIBER OPTIC TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

CONTRACT NO. : __________________________

HANDHOLE NO. : __________________________ JOINT BOX NO. : __________________________ LINK DESTINATION : __________________________ CABLE TYPE/No of cores: __________________________ CABLE Manufacturer : __________________________ INSTALLATION YEAR : __________________________

Marker plate details shall be as per COMPANY standard Drawing No. TB-800076.

The size/dimensions of the marker plates to be installed on the handhole collars shall be 75mm (W) x 150 mm (L).

N. Handholes shall be provided with necessary clamps and fixing hardware to enable coiling the extra length of fiber optic cable for future use. Refer to COMPANY Standard Drawing No. TA-800098.

O. The sides and base slab of each handhole shall be provided with two (2) layers of

waterproofing membrane (each minimum of 4mm thick). The membrane applied to vertical surface shall be protected with a 15 mm thick protection board and horizontal surface with 50 mm thick concrete screed & two (2) layers of 150 micron polyethylene sheet. Interior surfaces of the handholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of elastomeric cementitious impermeable membrane with the approval of COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

3.04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

A. Tack Coat

The tack coat shall be of rapid curing type cutback asphalt consisting of asphaltic base fluxed with suitable petroleum distillates. The product shall be free from water, show no separation prior to use, shall not foam when heated to application temperature and shall conform to the requirements of Grade RC-800 of ASTM D2028.

B. Bituminous Pavinq Mixture

1. Asphalt shall be petroleum asphalt cement, penetration grade 60-70, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D946.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


12 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

2. Mineral aggregates shall consist of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and filler

material all complying with the following requirements:

a. When tested according to ASTM C117 and ASTM C136, the combined mineral aggregates shall conform to the gradation of COMPANY Construction Standards TCS-Q-113.01.

The grading limits specified on Table 7 are based on materials of

uniform specific gravity and shall be adjusted by asphalt concrete manufacturer to compensate for any variations in specific gravity of the individual sizes. The grading may be varied on the basis of marshal tests to obtain optimum stability and life of the bituminous paving mixture.

b. The combined mineral aggregates for asphalt concrete binder course

and asphalt concrete wearing course shall consist of crushed rock or crushed gravel. It shall be clean, hard, tough, durable and sound and shall be of uniform quality, free fromo98 soft and friable materials and shall conform to the following physical requirements:

Sand Equivalent : 45 minimum (ASTM D2419) Plasticity Index (ASTM D4318) Binder Course : 6 maximum Wearing Course : 3 maximum Loss by Abrasion % (ASTM C131) Binder Course : 50% maximum Wearing Course : 40% maximum Loss by Sodium Sulfate Soundness Test (ASTM C88) Course Aggregate : 12% maximum Fine Aggregate : 15% maximum Loss by Magnesium Sulfate Soundness (ASTM C88) Course Aggregate : 18% maximum Fine Aggregate : 20% maximum Thin and Elongated pieces, by weight (larger than 25 mm, thickness less than 1/5 length) per CRD-C119 : 5% maximum

C. Asphalt Concrete Mix Design

1. The asphalt concrete mix design shall be submitted for review and approval by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE at least thirty (30) days prior to start




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


13 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

production of plant mix. The design shall be according to COMPANY Standard TCS-Q-113.01.

3.05 REINFORCING STEEL

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all reinforcing steel required for civil WORK. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed steel bars conforming to SASO SSA- 2/79 with minimum yield stress of 420 MPa. Deformations shall conform to ASTM A615M.

3.06 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A. General 1. Waterproofing membrane shall be a purpose design and have proven

application in the Kingdom considering thermal expansion and contraction. 2. CONTRACTOR shall submit samples and brochures of the product for

COMPANY review and acceptance. 3. Waterproofing membrane shall be installed by the membrane manufacturer, or

on his behalf, by a professional waterproofing CONTRACTOR approved by the manufacturer, acceptable to the COMPANY.

4. CONTRACTOR shall submit the installation procedure for COMPANY review

and approval. 5. The waterproofing material and the installation of the membrane shall be

guaranteed for a minimum period of ten (10) years.

B. Modified Bituminous Waterproofing Membrane

1. This type of membrane shall be used especially for underground structures

such as cable tunnels/cable entry rooms, electrical manholes, communication handholes, and septic tanks as well as for roofs.

2. Membrane shall be bitumen modified with Attactic Polypropylene (APP). The

membrane shall be reinforced with isotropic spun bounded, non-woven polyester mat 4mm thick. Membrane shall have the following specifications:

Properties Typical Values Standards Thickness Minimum 4mm

Reinforcement: Non-woven polyester 200 gm/m²

Ultimate Tensile Strength, N/5cm @ 25°C

Longitudinal

Transverse

950

800

ASTM D5147

Ultimate elongation, % @ 25°C

Longitudinal

Transverse

45

50




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


14 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

Tear Resistance, N

Longitudinal

Transverse

600

400

ASTM D5147

Softening Point, °C 155 ASTM D36

Low temperature flexibility, °C -6 to -10 ASTM D5147

Water Absorption, % Wt @ 23°C 24 hours Less than 1 ASTM D5147

Resistance to aging & UVWeather-O-meter 2000 hours

No change greater than 20% of the original values

ASTM G53

Puncture Resistance, N 1155 ASTM E154

Water Vapor Transmission, g/m²/24 hours, RH 90% at 38°C

Less than 0.5 ASTM E96

Resistance to Leakage at Joints Pass UAEtc

Penetration, @ 25°C, dmm 20 ASTM D5

Dimensional Stability %

Longitudinal

Transverse

+ 0.5

- 0.5

ASTM D5147

Load Strain product @ 25°C

Longitudinal

Transverse

42,750

40,000

Lap joint strength, N/5cm (Longitudinal and Transverse)

Same as membrane

Installation Procedure: A layer of bituminous primer is cold applied on the cleaned screed using a plaster roller with organic, solvent resistant wool.

The rolls of membranes are laid one by one on the dried primer and properly aligned to cover the entire surface. Each membrane is re-rolled and unrolled systematically for torching by means of a propane gas torch.

Overlapping seams of adjacent rolls of membranes shall be torched and pressed tightly.

Control joints shall be provided at locations determined based on the geometry configuration and drainage characteristics of the roof.

The waterproofing membrane shall pass over the parapet and be fixed under the aluminum flashing.

Between the levels, the protection of waterproofing vertical edges is provided by a metal section (aluminum flashing) used as water drip. The metal section is nailed to the vertical wall and its upper part is sealed using suitable elastic sealer. The waterproofing membrane shall be raised on the walls to the same level of the surrounding parapet.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


15 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

C. Bituminous Roofing Primer Roofing primer shall be formulated from highly pliable, flexible bitumen, select petroleum solvents and compounded with wetting and saturation additives. It shall comply with ASTM D41 with the following specifications:

Properties Typical Values Standards

Density at 25°C, kg/liter 0.86 to 0.89 ASTM D70

Viscosity at 25°C, cps 70 - 150 ASTM D88

Drying time to touch at 25°C 3 hours

Drying time, through at 25°C 24 hours

Non-volatile, % weight 45 (minimum) ASTM D402

Volatile, % weight 55 (maximum) ASTM D402

Water content Zero ASTM D55

Shelf life 2 years

Penetration at 25°C of asphalt from distillation up to 360°C, dmm

20 - 50 ASTM D55

It shall have the following outstanding features: 1. Optimum penetration of primer into the surface pores, pinholes and cracks.

2. The primer shall allow for better saturation, dust absorption and adhesion.

Primer shall prepare the surface for a permanent and durable bond between the substrate and the membrane.

D. Water flood tests

For cable tunnels, manholes, handholes, trenches, all de-watering operations shall be stopped completely after the installation of waterproofing membrane. If any leakage is found inside the cable tunnel or under the roof slab, the CONTRACTOR shall take all the remedial measures acceptable to the COMPANY.

3.07 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. All earthwork and asphalt materials and all other necessary materials within the

COMPANY facilities shall conform to the requirements specified in the COMPANY Construction Specifications for Earthwork TCS-Q-113.02 and Specification for Asphalt Concrete Paving TCS-Q-113.01.

B. All backfill materials shall be furnished from a source accepted by the COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE. Acceptance of a backfill source shall not mean automatic acceptance of all material obtained from the source, and the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE may withdraw approval of the source at any time that materials produced by the source are not suitable for backfill. If suitable, excavated material can also be used for backfill subject to the approval of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


16 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

3.08 LINK BOX PITS/BARRICADES

Protective crash barriers shall be installed per Drawing No. TA-800133.

A heavy duty galvanized chain link shall be provided between the barriers, provision shall be made at the barrier to secure the chain link properly.

3.09 LINK BOX PITS

The pits shall have 150mm thick reinforced concrete walls. Contractor to determine the size of the pits to enable at least two persons to enter and do maintenance work inside.

The walls of pits shall project 100mm clear of the surrounding ground level. The pit lid and frame shall be made of cast iron and shall have watertight "machine-fit" interface surfaces and the lid shall have the word ELECTRICITY embossed on it.

The pits and covers shall be capable of bearing a loading of 10 tons. A set of lifting keys shall be supplied with each link box pit cover.

The pits shall be sealed to prevent ingress of water. The Contractor's proposal to prevent ingress of water shall be clearly indicated in the designs submitted. Any sealing method proposed should take account of the Company's requirement to open the pit for maintenance testing purposes and also the life of the seal proposed.

3.10 LINK BOX FOUNDATIONS

Concrete foundations shall be provided to support the link box. Top of concrete foundations shall be of the same elevation, with the top of concrete at 150mm (minimum) to 450mm (maximum).

Design criteria for the design of foundations shall be in accordance with TES-P- 119.18 and TES-P-119.19.

3.11 DUCT SEALING UNITS

The duct sealing units to be provided shall be conforming to the COMPANY Material Standard Specification 23-TMSS-02, Rev.0.

**** END OF SECTION III ****




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


17 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

SECTION IV – INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

4.01 GENERAL A. The subsequent sections will present the requirements and practices, which shall be

the basis for the installation of 380kV underground cables and fiber optic cables for the system of SEC-COA.

B. The installation practices that will be presented are consistent with the current

industry standards with special consideration being given to the working environment found in Saudi Arabia.

C. The CONTRACTOR must strictly adhere to the requirements of COMPANY

Engineering Standard TES-P-104, Construction Standard and TCS-P-104 as applicable, attached Conceptual Design Drawings, and the Practices and Procedures mentioned in the subsequent sections.

4.02 CABLE TUNNEL REQUIREMENTS


The 380kV underground cable circuits shall be using cable tunnel and in concrete encased ductbanks. The physical requirement of the cable tunnel and concrete encased ductbanks shall be in accordance with the COMPANY'S Engineering Standard TES-P-104.05, TCS-P-104.06 and TA-800062, respectively. The COMPANY Construction Standard TCS-P-104.03 for the construction of cable tunnel shall be followed.

B. Safety

The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of personnel working in the tunnel and the general public. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the following guidelines: 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for conforming to the rules and regulations

pertaining to safety established by the ministries, municipalities, traffic and COMPANY Loss Prevention Division.

2. Should there be closing/re-routing of traffic; the CONTRACTOR will properly

coordinate with the concerned authorities. When required, the CONTRACTOR should be more than willing to assign someone to direct the traffic or act as flagman.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cable tunnel signboards on every tunnel

/road crossing and 200 meters on straight run, the signboards shall be in accordance with SB-036883.

C. Other Underground Utilities

Prior to excavation, the CONTRACTOR shall gather all necessary information regarding other existing underground services such as oil, gas, water, telephone, sewage, other electric cables (Power & distribution cables), building structures and shall use all precautions in excavating to avoid any damage to any underground




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


18 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

utilities. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully liable for any damage caused to any service during cable installation by his personnel. Other utilities found during underground utilities survey shall be plotted in the construction drawing "As-Built" drawing.

D. Tunnel Excavation in Hiqh Water Table Areas

In areas where high water table causes the tunnel excavation to become flooded, the excavation shall be cleared by either pumping or installation of a well point system depending upon the actual SITE conditions. Tunnel excavation subject to high water table must be shored to minimize tunnel-wall sloughing. The water removed from the tunnel shall be disposed of in a proper manner either by pumping to a storm water system or water tank trucks. If water is to be pumped into municipal sewage/storm water system, prior approvals must be obtained from the Municipal Sewage Authority.

E. Maintenance of Cable Tunnel

The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to maintain the condition of the tunnel prior to the installation of the cables. Maintenance shall include prevention of cave-ins or sloughing of the trench walls and dewatering of the trenches. Cable tunnel and pit shall be continuously cleaned. No foreign matter shall be backfilled with cables that may damage the cable in future.

F. Other Tunnel Excavation Requirements

1. The CONTRACTOR shall open only the width of tunnel as specified in the CONTRACT. The COMPANY shall not reimburse the CONTRACTOR for trenching or reinstatement in excess of the contractual widths or depths.

2. Asphalt and other non-reusable debris, which are excavated from the tunnel

must be removed from the WORK SITE immediately and hauled to a Municipality approved dumping area.

3. Authorities may grant only a limited time for complete reinstatement of a trench

section. 4. After completing the reinstatement WORK, the CONTRACTOR will be

required to submit an acceptance certificate to the COMPANY from the concerned agencies; otherwise, such WORK will not be accepted by the COMPANY.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reinstatement/restoration of any disturbed or damaged facility, which is incidental to PROJECT performance.

4.03 CABLE DUCTBANKS


Design and construct concrete encased ductbanks at road crossings. Design and construction of concrete encased ductbanks shall be in accordance to ACI 318M-08. Ductbanks shall be designed using AASHTO HS 20 truck load. Concrete encased




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


19 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

ductbanks shall span the road where the 380kV underground cables and Fiber Optic cable are to cross. All cable ducts installation shall follow the requirements of the COMPANY'S Construction Standard TCS-P-I04.03

B. Bell Ends

Bell ends shall be provided at the exit and at entrance of each duct. The bell end shall be an extension of the plastic duct, therefore, bell end inserts, which have a smaller internal diameter than the plastic duct, shall not be used.

C. Testing and Cleaninq

Upon completion of a duct run, a test mandrel (6 mm less in diameter than the nominal inside diameter of the duct) and wire brush cleaner (slightly larger than the duct) shall be pulled through to each duct. The testing and cleaning of a concrete encased ductbank should be done on the day after the concrete has been poured to eliminate any concrete, which may have seeped into the ducts. A nylon pull line should be installed in each duct line after cleaning and all ducts shall be immediately sealed at both ends by using duct sealing units.

4.04 THRUST BORINGS

If thrust boring/directional drilling is required, comply with COMPANY Standard TES-P-104.05, Clause 8.2.3. Refer to COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800062, TA-800063 and TA-800068 for Highway undercrossing for 110 kV to 380 kV power cables by directional drilling.

4.05 REINSTATEMENT OF PAVEMENT SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE

A. General Information

The reinstatement shall be in accordance with latest approved specifications and/or the following paragraph as applicable.

The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY a list of test procedures and schedule of testing. The CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of an independent testing agency acceptable to the COMPANY, to conduct verification tests of in-place density at an average interval of 400 meters along tunnel, if so requested by the COMPANY. This testing will be conducted by the COMPANY approved testing agency.

4.06 ASPHALT REINSTATEMENT

A. General Paving Requirements for Hot Asphalt Mix

The CONTRACTOR shall provide hot asphalt mix and necessary primer. Cutting of pavement shall be only by saw. Areas to be paved shall be substantially true to line and grade, and have a firm surface without foreign materials. The paving mixture shall be placed when the air temperature is below 50°F (10°C) and is falling. The paving mixture shall be placed only when the humidity, general weather conditions




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


20 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

and temperature of the base, in the opinion of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE are suitable. Paving mixture shall be delivered to the WORK location at a temperature no less than 235°F (113°C) and never exceed 350°F (177°C).

The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY a list of test procedures and the schedule of testing. The CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of an independent testing agency acceptable to the COMPANY. All asphalt material and construction shall conform to the requirements of the COMPANY Standards.

B. Placing of Mixture

The mixture shall be placed in the number of lifts and thickness indicated (approved paving thickness by the COMPANY).

C. Compacting the Mixture

The mixture shall be compacted immediately after placing. Each rolling operation shall follow the preceding operation as closely as possible. In areas too small for a roller, a vibrating plate compactor or hand tamper may be used to achieve thorough compaction.

D. Compaction and Testing Requirements

1. One (1) composite sample of asphalt mix shall be taken each production day from the first truck load of mix delivered to the WORK SITE, for laboratory testing. The sample shall be taken by the COMPANY designated agency and tested in accordance with ASTM D1559 to determine the laboratory density requirements (50 blow marshall), and the following:

a) Gradation b) Flow test with an accepted range in between 8 and 16 c) Stability, lb. (at 140°F, 60 °C) of 1000 lb. minimum for both layers

2. The asphalt pavement placed in the field shall be equal to or greater than 95%

of the laboratory Marshall Density determined for the material being used (ASTM D1559).

3. One (1) sample of the compacted asphalt pavement for each 100 linear

meters of road reinstated shall be tested per ASTM D1559.

4. Additional requirements are needed to identify the type of asphalt mix (tested in laboratory).

5. To be able to evaluate the materials being used, the CONTRACTOR shall

conduct and submit the following tests, prior to use, to demonstrate conformance of proposed backfill materials and mix designs:

a) Mechanical Analysis b) Plasticity Index C) Relative Density d) Modified Compaction e) Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content (Nuclear Method by using of

Gamma Rays)




DE

SCR

IPT

ION

C

HK

’A

PP’

CE

RT

.


21 OF 21

0 JOB ORDER NO.


REVISIONS

NO

.

3 2 1


BA CERTIFIED

BY: M. SAFAR

DATE

f) Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content taken samples done in the laboratory

g) Marshall Stability h) Asphalt Mix Design i) Marshall Design Check j) Field Curing for Field Compaction Check

4.07 OTHER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Responsibility During Installation

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all materials and component parts during installation. Failure of any cable and/or component during installation or testing shall cause the faulty cable and/or component to be unacceptable until all test results are reviewed and corrective action taken. To minimize failures at final testing, the CONTRACTOR shall physically check and test the cable in segments during installation.

**** END OF SECTION IV ****

APPENDIX - XIII

SPECIAL TOOLS & EQUIPMENT

(To provided by CONTRACTOR)

APPENDIX- XVI

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND

MATERIAL TESTING

;-:a:'"U

Q~"'Q'"Ci

z0i=...Q2u'"'"'"

(3z "' N

REVISIONS_,

""EI'AR~DATE ~CIIK'D.IY. ~

AI'.'.<OVEn

EHV-E&DDENC. SUI'I'ORT DIV.

/411/1,- CSM

2012-n9-26

OI'[RATING DEI'ARTMENT

CERT''''''

DATE. nl2-n9-2<,

THIS nRAWING IS NOTTO BE USEn FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTlFlEn ANn I)ATEn

.JOB ORnER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4~ ~j~\ ~y1j\

{~~ s:.L:t~ ~~~t AS'~I

Saudi Electricity Company

APPENDIX -XVI-

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

-- .~

AND

MATERIAL TESTING

(ATTACHMENTTO SERVICE ORDER NO. 1 )

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT NOJ INDEX I DOCUMENTNO. PAGENO. REV.

1A IAPPENDIX. XVII OF 0

49

,..:~v

Q

t.,

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ ~y1j\

Q

~u

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION - PARAGRAPH T ITL E PAGE

5SCOPE OF WORKz0;::Q.,02uVJtoOQ

611 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

2.012.022.03

z '"~ -.....

IMTE, 2012-09-2(,

CIIK'IJBY,

AI'PROVED

F.IIV.F.&DDF.NC. Slll'PORT DIV.

atIICSM

2012-09-26

OPERATING IJEPARTMENT

'b

IMTE, 2011-09-2(,

2.04

THIS BRA WING IS NOTTO BE USED FOR

CONSTRlICTlON ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

2.05

Mobilization and DemobilizationSchedule and Order of Work

Exploration/Drilling and Sampling Methods

666

A. Overburden Drilling1) Small Diameter Auger Drilling2) Large Diameter Auger Drilling3) Rotary Drilling

6

B. 7Soil Sampling and Testing1) Soil Classification Sampling2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)3) "Undisturbed" Samples

C. Sampling of Cemented Soil, Stiff Clay and Soft Rock1) Drive Samples2) Double Tube Barrel Samples

9

D. Rock Drilling and Coring1) Overburden Drilling and Stabilization2) Rock Drilling3) Core Drilling

10

E. Sample Containers1) Soil Classification and SPT Samples2) "Undisturbed" Samples3) Rock Cores

13

F.G.H.

Care and Delivery of SamplesFreightingSupplementary Work

171717

Exploration/Open Excavation and Sampling Methods 18

A.B.C.

Test Pits and SamplingTest Trenches and SamplingTesting

182020

Exploration/Cone Penetration Test Methods 20

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT NOJ INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. I PAGE NO.I

REV.

2lA IAPPENDIX.XVII OF 0

49

;-:"'"uQ

~~

Q'":!:U

z0f:"-Q2uif>~

0z '" M

DATE' 2U12.o<).26

CIIK'D BY,

API"WVED

EBV.E&DDENG, SUppORT ,)IV.

ft)I/CSM

2012.0<).26

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

I

DATE, "'''.''<).''

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.JOB ORDER NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

TABLE OF CONTENTS(Con't.)

TITL ESECTION - PARAGRAPH

2,06

2,07

2,082,09

Exploration/Geophysical Methods

A, Refraction Seismic Test1) Equipment2) Procedures3) Records4) Analyses and Reports

B, Cross-Hole Seismic Testing1) Objective and Principle2) Equipment3) Procedures4) Records5) Analyses and Reports

C, Electrical Resistivity

Standards for In-Situ Field Testing and Instrumentation

A.B,C,0,E,

Dry Unit Weight and Moisture ContentMoisture Content DirectPlate Bearing TestsFull Scale Spread Footing Load TestsPile Load Tests1) Compression Load Test2) Tension Load Test3) Lateral Load Test4) Inclined Tension Load Test

F, Ground Water Observations and Permeability Tests1) Piezometer Installation and Observation2) Permeability Testing

G,

H,

I.

J,

K,

L,

Electrical ResistivityThermal ResistivityField Vane Shear TestPressure Meter TestPercolationOther Consideration

Field RecordsLaboratory Testing

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


s:-4"'+s'u~J~\ ~y1j\

PAGE

20

21

22

23

23

2324242424

25

292929292929

3031

SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.!

REV.


49

,.;"'"uQ~~

Q""u

zci="-0;:Uen'"0

:;;z .., N

.

DATE' 2(112-(19-2(,

CIIK'D BY,

A"I"WYW

EHY-E&DI)ENC, SlIl'l'DHT DlY-

1iJ,V'CSM

2(112-(19-26

O"ERATlNG DEI'AHTMENT

eE,n'F D

\A'~- ~BY, MOIIAMMA')Al1SAFFAI!

DATE, '"2-(19-26

TillS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION OR

FOR ORDEIHNGMATERIALS UNTIL

CERTIFIED AND DATED

.JOB ORDER NO,

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ..4~ ~j~\ ~y11\

TABLE OF CONTENTS(Con't.)

SECTION - PARAGRAPH T ITL E PAGE

312,10

2,11

Standards for Laboratory Testing

A,

B,

C,

D,

E.F.G,

Visual ClassificationClassification TestingIndex Properties TestingStructural Properties TestingCompaction TestingChemical AnalysesOther Testing

31323233343535

Laboratory Test Records 35

III GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL LOGS 36

3.013,023,033,043,053,063,07

GeneralDensity of SoilsConsistency of SoilsCemented Overburden MaterialsRockField Notes and Records

Final Logs

36404041414242

IV GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 45

4,014.024,03

GeneralScopeFormat

454545

A-B,C.D.E,F.G,

H,

I.

J,

K,

Executive SummaryScope of WorkProject DescriptionSite ConditionField InvestigationLaboratory TestsSubsurface ConditionsEngineering AnalysisRecommendationsCertificationIllustrations

4546464646464747474848

ROllNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO, NO.!REV,


49

~v

Q

~-<

Q

'"Cl

z0;:"-0:uif>'"Q

ciz

'" N

REVISIONS

PREI'ARE!)By~4BAn:, 21112-119-21>

CIIK'B BY,

API'ROYED

EIIV-E&IJIJENC. SUI'I'ORT mv.

{ttI/CSM

21112-119-21>

OPERATING BEPARTMENT

BATE, 2012-09-21>

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION OR

FOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ A.5y1J\

SECTION I - SCOPE OF WORK

The CONTRACTOR (Geotechnical Consultant) shall perform all WORK in accordancewith the latest ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) Standards, exceptwhere indicated otherwise in Section 11,Technical Provisions; or, by such otherstandards specifically authorized in the SERVICE ORDER. For tests where noaccepted or tentative ASTM Standard exists, test procedures will be subject toapproval by the COMPANY.

The CONTRACTOR shall perform all investigations, field and laboratory tests asrequired in, and prepare all reports, charts and graphs as instructed in each SERVICEORDER issued by the COMPANY and accepted by the CONTRACTOR. TheCONTRACTOR shall not commence any WORK prior to the execution of suchSERVICE ORDER.

The CONTRACTOR shall review the proposed Scope of Work for a geotechnicalinvestigation of a given PROJECT to determine if it is adequate for the level ofprofessional responsibility associated with presentation of conclusions andrecommendations as outlined in Section IV - Guidelines for Geotechnical Report, ofthis Specification.

The CONTRACTOR, by acceptance of a SERVICE ORDER discussed in Item No. 1.03above, shall be obligated to provide the COMPANY with Geotechnical Reportconsistent with the professional standards of skill, care and diligence associated withhigh quality, international practice of geotechnical engineering.

Intermittent services are generally anticipated on all material testing projects. TheCOMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will give at least one day notice each time theCONTRACTOR is required to visit the site for material testing. Immediately upon theavailability of test results, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) copies to theCOMPANY Transmission Asset Development Department/Bulk Asset PlanningDivision.

*** END OF SECTION - I ***

SECTION 11- TECHNICAL PROVISIONSROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


1.01

1.02

-

1.03

1.04

1.05

SAUDI ARABIA

.JOB ORDER NO.

PLANTNO DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.

SA IAPPENDIX. XVII OF 0

49

;-:~u

Q

~~

Q'""u

z01=0..i:2uen'"'Q

0z .., N

REVISIONS

PREPARED In', ¥DATE, 2012-09-21>

C"K'I) BY,

AI'PIWYED

EIIV-E&I)I)ENG, SIJl'PORT I)IV,

fJiI/CSM

2012-09-21>

OPERATING I)EI'ARTMENT

0I)ATE, 2012-09-'"

TillS DRAWING IS NOTTO liE USED FORCONSTRUCTION OR


2.01

-

2.02

2.03

SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY ~L:~ ~J~\ ~y1!\

MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

A, Mobilization for geotechnical investigations and field load tests shall consist of thedelivery at the WORK SITE of all plant, equipment, materials and supplies to befurnished by the CONTRACTOR; the complete assembly in satisfactory workingorder of all such plant equipment on the job; and the satisfactory storage at theWORK SITE of all such materials and supplies,

B, Demobilization for the above shall consist of the removal from the site of all plant,equipment, and refuse after completion of the WORK,

C, No mobilization and demobilization shall be applied to material testing jobs, Sitevisits shall be paid on mileage unit rates, which shall include all direct and indirectvehicle and personnel charges,

SCHEDULE AND ORDER OF WORK

The schedule and order of WORK for geotechnical exploration and for field load testswill be shown on the documents for each PROJECT COMPANY, whenever and inwhatever manner is deemed best for accomplishing the WORK,

The schedule and order of material testing WORK will depend on the size and natureof the project. As and when required, the CONTRACTOR will be called uponintermittently to provide material testing services,

EXPLORATION - DRilLING AND SAMPLING METHODS

A. Overburden Drilling

1) Small Diameter Auqer Borinqs

The scope, apparatus, report and procedure shall be in accordance with ASTMD1452, "Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Boring", Samples shall beobtained for each material change in sufficient quantity to reveal the subsurfaceconditions and for such laboratory testing as may be required, Augering will notbe continued below the water table when encountered,

2) Larqe Diameter Auqer Borinqs

The Augering shall be performed in soil and/or decomposed rock with drillingequipment capable of advancing a helical auger bit having a diameter equal toor greater than 760 mm (30 inches), Adaptors should be provided to permit soilsampling with thin-wall Shelby tube samplers as described in subparagraph3,B,3 of these Technical Provisions, The scope and report procedures specifiedin ASTM D1452 shall apply,

3) Rotary Drillinq

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONANDMATERIAL TESTING

.1011 ORDER NO,

SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO, NO.!

REV,

6lA IAPPENDIX- XVII OF 0

49

""'"uQ

k~

Q

~u

z0i="-52uCh'"Q

0z

'" N

REVISIONS

PREPARED BY, ~. RO FP

DATF' -.. 21112-119-21>

CHK'D BY,

APPROYW

EIIV-E&1)1)ENC, SUPPORT mv,

~CSM

21112-119-21>


,

DATE, "112.119-21>


FOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTIL

CERTIFIED AND DATED

JOB ORDER NO,

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:.4~ ~j~1 ~y.1.J1

a) Definition

Overburden rotary drilling will be any drilling made through soil overburdenor decomposed rock by drilling equipment utilizing power rotation of adrilling bit as circulating fluid removes cuttings from the hole.

b) Eill!lQ.ment and Procedure

-

The equipment and procedures used for overburden drilling for or with SPTand undisturbed sampling shall be in accordance with the equipment andmethods recommended in U.S. Navy Design Manual NAVFAC DM-7.1,entitled "Soil Mechanics" dated May 1982, except as modified hereinafter.In areas where a water table is encountered in overburden or decomposedrock materials, or where caving of the sidewalls occurs, borings may bedrilled by using suitable drilling mud slurry.

The drilling mud shall be maintained at the top of the hole during all drillingand sampling operations. The mud slurry may consist of bentonite-water orattapulgite-water mixtures as required for stabilization of the hole. Samplingprocedure shall be by such means as will prevent inclusions of the drillingmud in the samples. Otherwise, the borings shall be suitably cased toprevent collapse of the sidewalls and to permit sampling.

B. Soil Samplinq and Testinq

1) Soil Classification Samples

Samples retrieved from augering and cuttings retrieved from rotary drilling shallbe retained for Classification and Index properties testing. The scope ofsampling, procedures and report shall be in accordance with ASTM 01452.Recovery of samples is incidental to drilling and cost shall be included in theapplicable unit rates for drilling.

2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

The scope, apparatus, procedure, and report shall be in accordance with ASTM01586, "Standard Method of Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling ofSoils", except as modified herein. The intent of the Standard Penetration Test isto determine resistance, the consistency of the materials, depth at which rockcoring shall commence, and to obtain samples. SPT sampling is not consideredincidental to drilling and shall be paid by the unit rate for each penetration test.

a) Equipment and Supplies

Equipment shall include split barrel samples, power driven core drillingmachinery of a type or types approved by the ACOMPANY, and all otheraccessories for taking samples of soil or decomposed rock. Unlessotherwise specified, drilling machinery shall be of the "hydraulic feed" type.

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT NOJ INDEX I DOCUMENTNO. I PAGENO. REV.


49

,.::;:u

Q

~"'Q

~Cl

z0;::"-

Q2uen'"Q

0z .., M

REVISIONS

PR[PARm 'IV,

DATE'

CIIK'D IIY,

APPROVED

EIIV-E&DDENG. SUI'PORT DIV.

/JIt1CSM

2n!)-n9-2(,


...,

DATE, 'n!)-n9-",

THIS DI{AWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTIWCTlON ORFOR ORI>ERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTlFIEI> AND I>ATEI>

.JOB ORI>ER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4~ ~..I~\ ~y:J\

Borings may be advanced above the water table by augering or, by rotarydrilling for the full depths of boring. Supplies shall include all casing, piping,pumps, and power necessary to accomplish the required boring andsampling.

b) Procedure

-

Standard Penetration Test (SPT) shall be taken at maximum verticalintervals of 750 mm (2-1/2 ft) for the first 3 meters (10 ft) of depth,measured from ground surface and at maximum intervals of 1.5 meters (5ft) thereafter, or as otherwise directed. If it becomes apparent that gravel orrock fragments are rendering SPT results meaningless, or if refusal isconsistently encountered, SPTs shall be discontinued. In material otherthan gravels, refusal shall be defined as an SPT with less than 100 mm (4inches) penetration per 50 blows. The samples shall be placed in air-tightplastic bags or other containers as soon as possible after they are takenfrom the hole in order that the natural moisture content of the material maybe retained to the fullest extent.

3) "Undisturbed" Soil Samples

The scope, apparatus, procedure, preparation for shipment, and report shall bein accordance with ASTM 01587, "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils", exceptas modified herein.

a) Definition

An undisturbed sample is a thin-walled tube sample taken in accordancewith ASTM 01587, using piston-type samplers. Nonpiston-type or open-tube with ball check valve type samplers may be used only whenauthorized by the COMPANY and should be clearly indicated as such on alllogs, records and reports.

b) Equipment and Supplies

Equipment shall include samplers, power-driven core drilling machinery ofan approved type or types, and accessories for procuring undisturbed soilsamples. Drilling machinery shall be of the "hydraulic feed" type unlessotherwise specified. Supplies shall include all casing, piping, pumps andpower necessary to accomplish the required boring and sampling whereused. Drill casing shall have an inside diameter such as to allow the takingof proper samples of the size directed by the COMPANY.

c) Procedure

The thin wall sampler shall be forced down by a continuous push using thehydraulic feed. Driving of the sampler by means of a drop hammer will notbe permitted. For tube samples containing medium stiff to very stiff clays,the ends shall be sealed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM01587. For tube samples containing cohesionless soil or soft clay requiringspecial handling and testing, the ends of the sample tubes shall be cleaned

ROLlNFP/CSM- 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONAND MATERIALTESTING

SAUDI ARABIA



49

,.:0<'"U

Q

~.,Q'"'"u

z0f="-"u'"'"Q

0z .., N

REVISIONS

PREPARED IIV. ~DAn;. 2Z-26

CIIK'D IIV.

AI'I'IWVED

EHV-E&I)l)

ENG. SUPPORT DIV.

ttlJ/CSM

21112-09-26

Ol'mATING DEPARTMENT

CERTIFIED

-1\

DAn:. ""2-09-)(,

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRuCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS lINTlLCERTIFIED AND DATED

,lOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~L:~ ~J~\ ~y:;J\

out to a depth of 76 mm (3 inches) and a seal provided of micro-crystallinewax, such as Humble Oil Company Microven No, 1650, Gulf Petrowax A, orSocony Product 2300, 2305, or equal. A metal or metal and rubber "0" ringtype expansion disc having a diameter slightly less than the diameter of thetube shall be inserted into the wax at 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of thesoil sample, The wax plugs shall be flush with the ends of the tube and afinal seal consisting of a metal/plastic cap and/or plastic adhesive tape shallbe placed over the ends, Special sample containers will be accepted uponapproval of the COMPANY.

d) Loqqinq and Labelinq

Particular care shall be taken to indicate the relative positions and the topsand bottoms of samples, Tubes and crates for undisturbed samples shallbe labeled "Do not Jar or Vibrate" and "Handle, haul and Ship in aHorizontal Position",

-

e) Disposition of Samples

Every precaution shall be taken to avoid damage of samples as a result ofcareless handling and undue delay in shipping, Samples shall be shippedin wooden boxes made from 16 mm (5/8-inch), or heavier, lumber and witha capacity for holding up to six sample-containing tubes depending onshipping weight restrictions. The sample tubes shall be well packed in woodshavings, foam or other equal material to protect the samples againstvibration. The CONTRACTOR shall avoid exposing sealed and cratedsamples to extremes of temperature. Samples permitted to freeze, evenpartially, shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his expense.Undisturbed samples shall not remain on the site of sampling for more thanone (1) week before being freighted for testing. Samples shall be hauledand freighted with the tube in a horizontal position in order to preventconsolidation and segregation of water content.

c. Samplinq of Cemented Soil, Stiff Clay and Soft Rock

1) Drive Samplers

"California" type drive samplers having segmented brass liners may be used forsampling cemented soil or stiff clays, provided that no significant disturbance ofthe natural materials occurs during sampling, including alteration of natural soilstructure, density and/or shear strength. The sampler will be driven inaccordance with ASTM 01586 equipment and procedures; and an appropriatecorrelation of blow count with "N" values obtained by SPT procedures will beprovided by the CONTRACTOR. The individual segments of the liner will beremoved from the outer split-tube after sampling, the natural materials exposedat the ends visually classified, and the liner segment capped, sealed andlabeled. No attempt shall be made to eject the sample from the liner segment inthe field. Disposition of samples will be done in accordance with the proceduresspecified below for Double Tube Barrel Samplers. Care, handling and deliveryof samples will be done in accordance to the requirements of Clauses 3.E, 3,Fand 2.03.G of this Technical Specification.

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

"::iu SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ..L:~ ~J~\ A.s~\Q

~~

Q

~u

z0;:""

i:2uV)'"Q

2) Double Tube Barrel Samplers shall be used for hard clays, cemented coarsegrained soils, chalk and soft or weathered rock, which cannot be recoveredintact by drive sampling or penetrated with thin-wall Shelby tube samplers.

a) Definition

A Double Tube Barrel Sample shall be a sample recovered with either aDenison double tube core sampler or a Pitcher sampler having a protrudinginner barrel or liner tube.

b) Equipment and Supplies

0z "' M - Sampling equipment will include either Denison or Pitcher samplers. Linersshall be of 29 gauge steel with inner lacquered surface or equal. The lengthof protrusion of the inner barrel or liner, and the type of bit used on the outerbarrel shall be appropriate to the type of material being sampled and will besubject to approval by the COMPANY.

REVISIONS

PREPARF,ORV, RO FP

DATE, 2012-09-26

CIIK'D RV,

APPROVE!)

The maximum recovery of unpredictable soft rock or friable materials is theprimary purpose for use of this type of sampling equipment. Accessoryequipment and core drilling machinery will be as specified in subparagraph3.D.3.a of this Technical Specification.EIIV-E&[)D

ENG. SUPPORT !)IV.

CSM

c) Procedure

The sampling operation shall be advanced by continuous rotation of the outercutting barrel in conjunction with the circulation of the drilling fluid. Downpressure on the hydraulic feed and drilling fluid flow should be adequate forcontinuous smooth penetration of the sampler without undercutting theprotruding edge of the inner barrel. Blockages of circulation or suddenchanges in speed of advancement of the sampler are sufficient cause toterminate the sampling core run to avoid possible loss or damage of thesample. The natural materials exposed in the ends of the inner tube shall bevisually classified immediately following recovery of the sample. Samples,which appear to be suitable for laboratory testing shall be capped, sealed,labeled and treated as "Undisturbed Samples". Samples, which appear to besuitable only for laboratory classification tests may be ejected in the field andtreated as "Soil Classification Samples".

tUI/20 12-0?-2(,

OPERATING DEPART"I''''I

CERTIFIE!)

I!V'~

"ATE, 'tIl2-0?-2(,

D. Rock Drillinq and Corinq

1) Overburden Drillinqand Stabilization

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION OR


Where sampling of the overburden is limited to recovery of soil classificationsamples, the CONTRACTOR may employ any method and equipment fordrilling through the overburden that will permit rock and/or core drilling from therock surface downward in accordance with these specifications. The overburdenmay be stabilized by use of casing or a mud slurry drilling fluid but, in eitherprocedure, stabilization methods must be adequate to prevent caving of theoverburden.

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICALINVESTIGATIONAND MATERIAL TESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

.JOB ORDER NO.



49

,..:~u SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4~ ~..\~\ ~y1J\Q

~~

Q'":!:U A Standard Penetration Test with less than 50 mm (2 inches) penetration with

50 blows shall be used to determine top of rock.

2) Rock Drillinqz01=0..01u'J)""'"

0z '" N -

Where recovery of rock cores is not required, the COMPANY may require theCONTRACTOR to drill and log the condition of the rock. Where recovery of rockcores is required, the CONTRACTOR may elect to ream and clean the corehole to the bottom of the last core run prior to attempting the next core run. Ineither instance, the CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed for the depth of rockdrilling measured from the top of rock (as defined in subparagraph 3.D.1 above)to the bottom of boring. Repeated reaming and/or cleaning within this depth willnot be a separate pay item. Rock drilling may be done with a tricone bit, otherrock bits, or with the core barrel.REVISIONS

~PREPARED RV, IWUN

DAn:, '012-00-'6 3) Core DrillinqCIIK'DRV,

CSM

Scope, equipment, procedure, and report shall be in accordance with ASTMD2113, "Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation", except as modifiedherein. All core drilling shall be performed with NW size barrels and bits or withlarger sizes subject to the approval of the COMPANY. Coring shall not beperformed in soft, friable rocks or cemented soils, which can be more suitablysampled with the equipment, methods and procedures described insubparagraph 3.C. Recovery of representative rock cores is the primarypurpose for undertaking rock coring and, the CONTRACTOR will be paid onlyfor the actual length of rock core recovered. Payment for core recovery shall bein addition to the payment for rock drilling within the same depth. Equipmentand procedures shall be as described below, unless directed otherwise by theCOMPANY.

AI'PROVED

EIIY-E&DDENG. SUI'POIIT DIY.

tdI/

'012.0'.'6


a) Equipment and Supplies

DATE, 21112.0'.'6

Equipment for core drilling shall include diamond core drilling machinery ofa type or types approved by the COMPANY complete with all accessoriesfor taking continuous rock cores of consolidated or semi consolidatedmaterial of a diameter consistent with bit size to the depths specified.Machines shall be equipped with hydraulic feed head. The use of screw orfixed speed feed heads will not be permitted. The core drilling equipmentshall conform to NW core drilling equipment, equal or better than Sprague-Henwood (Model 40CL). The core drilling machine shall be able to developa bit speed of at least 1200 rpm and the hydraulic system shall be able todevelop at least 2760 kPa (400 psi) down pressure. The drill rods (NW)shall be the same size as the core barrel (NW) and the drill head shall beable to swivel 360 degrees. Since the maximum recovery of unpredictablesoft or friable rock is of prime importance, the CONTRACTOR shall use astandard ball-bearing, swivel-type, double-tube core barrel equipped withdiamond set core bits and standard core lifters similar in construction andequal in performance to Sprague and Henwood "M" series or a wireline

CERTIFIED

R\~~


ROLlNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

,lOB ORDER NO.

PLANT Nof

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO,I

REV.


49

'"~u

Q

~<:

Q'"

0

z0

E~uen'"Q

0z ,., N

REVISIONS

PREPARED IJY, ~DATE, ,n12.n9.'(,

CHK'O BY,

APPI"'VED

EHY.E&I)))ENG. SUPpORT DIY.

cJAICSM

20 12.n9.'('

OPERATING DEI'AlnMENI

DAn:, "'".119.'''


.JOB ORDICR NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY ~L:~ ~J~\ ~y.:;J1

drilling system similar in construction and equal in performance to Longyear"Q" series, The CONTRACTOR shall have both internal and bottomdischarge diamond core bits on the job. The diamond core bits will have theappropriate stones per carat recommended by the bit manufacturer for therock encountered, The CONTRACTOR will furnish all supplies for coredrilling, which shall include but not limited to, casing, drill rods, core barrels,diamond set coring bits, piping, pumps, water, tools and power required fordrilling and boxes and containers required for core samples, TheCONTRACTOR's drilling equipment shall be capable of drilling vertical coreholes to depths of at least 50 meters. Terrain may vary from flat to highrelief, thus necessitating skid mounted drills and suitable support equipmentin some locations.

b) Procedures

All holes shall be drilled vertically to the bottom elevations or depthsspecified unless indicated otherwise in the SERVICE ORDER or whendirected by the COMPANY to be drilled otherwise. Casing of theoverburden may be required when coring in soft rock or through anunstable overburden. The casing shall be seated tightly into rock prior toany coring. Otherwise, the CONTRACTOR may use drilling mud to keepthe hole open provided that during coring no contamination of rock samplesoccur and good core recovery is achieved. If the samples are contaminatedor otherwise inadequate, the CONTRACTOR shall drill a new hole to thesame depths and take additional rock cores at no additional cost to theCOMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall operate his drills at such speeds andwith such water pressures as will ensure maximum core recovery inwhatever kind of rock is being drilled. Where soft or broken rocks areencountered, the CONTRACTOR shall reduce the length of runs to 0.6meters (2 feet) or less and/or use a larger diameter core barrel in order toreduce core loss and core disturbance to the minimum. Failure to complywith the foregoing procedures shall constitute justification for theCOMPANY to require redrilling at the CONTRACTOR's expense of anyboring from which the core recovery is unsatisfactory. In as much as thefunction of core borings includes determination of the width, direction,extent and spacing of rock fractures, the CONTRACTOR shall exerciseparticular care in recording water losses, rod drops, and other unusualcoring experience that indicate the existence, nature and extent of anyfracturing or solution activity. Fractures and cavities with their estimatedthickness shall be marked in the core boxes. Spacers shall be used tovisually indicate open fractures, cavities or, samples, which have beenremoved.

c) Loqqinq and Labelinq

The CONTRACTOR shall keep a careful and complete record of the resultsof all boring and sampling. Soil and rock materials shall be classified by theCONTRACTOR immediately following the drilling. The log of each boringshall include the time of drilling required for each "run", with the precise

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONAND MATERIAL TESTING

SAUDI ARABIA


12A I APPENDIX. XVII OF 0

49

"e3u

Q

~<:

Q

'"u

z0;:"-

Oi!

Uen'"Q

0z

'" N

REVISIONS

PREI'AREDIIV, ~,

DATE, 21112-119-2<>

CHK'6BV,

APPROVE!>

EHV-E&OOENG. SUPPORT I>lV.

rWCSM

2012-119-2<>


DATE, 2012-09-2<>

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIF!F:D AND DATED

,JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ ~p\

depths and elevations of the top and bottom of the run, the percentage ofcore recovered per run, the depth and elevation at which ground water isencountered, and the amount of drill water lost. Each boring shall be loggedon a separate log sheet for each ten meters of drilling (or less), and acomplete log of each hole shall be submitted prior to payment for that hole,The labeling of core boxes shall be done in the manner prescribed, Thematerials encountered in drilling shall be visually classified according to soiltypes as defined in ASTM 02487 or, if appropriate, ASTM 03282,

d) Cementinq Holes Ourinq Orillinq

-The CONTRACTOR will take such precautions as necessary to preventmixing of caving materials from the walls of the hole with core samples, orto avoid loss of circulation of drill fluid and poor core recovery, This maynecessitate cementing the hole to seal or stabilize the side walls. Suchcementing will be considered incidental to the cost of rock coring and noextra payment will be made unless specifically agreed to in the SERVICEORDER.

E. SamQle Containers

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish jars, tubes, bags, labels, tags, boxes and cratesfor sample containment and freighting. Samples obtained from test borings shall becontained as follows:

1) Soil Classification and SPT Samples

Samples retained for laboratory classification (visual or by testing) may be inheavy duty plastic bags of one-quart capacity or other containers approved bythe COMPANY. Moisture content sample bags shall be tightly sealed to preventmoisture loss. Each bag shall be identified with a label or tag, which clearlyindicates the PROJECT, boring number, sample number, top elevation ofboring, sample depth, "N" value from SPT (if applicable), and a description ofmaterial.

2) "Undisturbed" Samples

This includes thin-wall Shelby tube samples, California (liner type) samples,Oenison or Pitcher samples, or any other samples recovered in metal tubes.The sample shall be retained in the tube for shipment to the laboratory. Forsamples consisting of stiff clays or cemented soils, the ends of the tube shall betightly sealed with wax, metal caps and/or plastic membrane, subject toapproval by the COMPANY, Sample tubes, containing cohesion less soils or softclays, shall be sealed as described in Section 2.03, paragraph B,3,c. Eachsample shall be identified with a label or tag as required in subparagraph (1)above,

3) Rock Cores

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT NOJ INDEX I DOCUMENTNO, I PAGENO, REV,

13A IAPPENDIX -XVII OF 0

49

"8Q

~~

Q'"'"u

z0;:0.;::Uif;'"'Q

0z '" N

REVISIONS

PREl'ARm BY, ~DATE, 2nl2.n9.",

CII"'DBY,

APPROVE!)

EHV-E&[)I)ENG, SUPPORT my.

(J)tICSM

2nl2.n9.26

OPERATING DEI'ART"ENT

CElnIF.ED

DATE, '"''.''9.'''

THIS DRAW[NG IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTlWCTlON ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

,JOB OIWER NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ 4.sy:;J\

a) Boxes

Longitudinally partitioned wooden core boxes constructed of dressed lumberor other approved materials in accordance with the arrangement anddimensions shown in Plate 11-1shall be used for all rock cores. As many coreboxes as may be required shall be used in submitting each rock core orgroup of cores. Core from more than one (1) test boring shall not be placedin a single core box except with written permission from the COMPANY, inwhich case the core holes contained in a single box shall be consecutivelynumbered. Core boxes shall be completely equipped with all necessarypartitions, covers, hinges and screws for holding down the cover, permanentidentification plates, tags, spacer blocks, and other accessories. The runnumber, core length drilled, core length lost, depth designation and recoveryshall be written directly upon the spacer blocks. The coordinates of theboring, ground surface elevation, date of drilling, box number, PROJECTname, hole number, delivery order number, and CONTRACTOR's nameshall be written upon the inside and outside of the lid. The inside label shallbe in accordance with the requirements shown on Plate 11-2.Each end of thebox shall be marked with the PROJECT name, hole number, and boxnumber. Empty portions of the core boxes shall have several wide dividerblocks nailed at about the third points to prevent the longitudinal dividersfrom bowing and allowing the sample to shift.



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.

14lA IAPPENDIX. XVII OF 0

49

"~u SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ..4~ ~j-p1 J..s-A\"t~"'""u

CSM

z01=0..:2uen'"Q

0Z

REVISIONS

~

EflV-E&DDENG. SUI'I'OHT I>lV.

t/f/

21112-11"-26

orEnATING OEI'AHTMENT

..

.DATE, '1112-11'-21,

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USEI) FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED ANI) DATEIJ PLATE 11-1

TYPICAL CORE BOX

ROLfNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

.JOB ORIJEI! NO.

PLANTN°iINDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

;-:"'"u SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ A..:..\~I~p\Q

~"'Q'""u

~

z0t:;;:

uen'"Q

E.

0z OFFSET:

REVISIONS

BOXES2012-09-26

APPROVED

HIV-E&I)I)ENG. SUppORT I>lV.

CSM

2012-09-26 NOTES:

1. LABEL OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO ALLOW ALL INFORMATION TO BE CLEAR ANDELIGIBLE ON PHOTOGRAPH OF CORE.OPERATING I>EI'ARTMENT

2. LOCATION MAY BE EITHER BY COORDINATES OR BY STATIONING, ASAPPROPRIATE TO THE PROJECT.

I>An:, '112-09-

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO HE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

PLATE 11-2

TYPICAL CORE BOX LABEL

b) Arrangement

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

.JOB ORDER NO.

PROJECT:

PTS NO./S.O. NO.

BORING NO.: -

ELEVATION:

COORDINATES: N.

STATION:

DATE (S) DRILLED:

BOX NO. OF

CONTRACTOR:

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

;-:~uQ

~~

Q

~Ci

z0i=..0::uen'"'Q

0z ..., N

REVISIONS

P"EPARED IIV, ~ M.DAn:, 2()12~()9~26

Cllbi'!> HY,

APPROVED

EIIV~E&IH)ENC. SUPPOI<T DIV.

ou/CSM

2()12~()9~26


l>An:, 2(112~()9~26



.IOB ORDER NO~

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4.J4-S.U~J~\ ~pl

-

All cores shall be arranged neatly in the partitioned boxes in the samesequence in which they occurred before removal from the hole. Facing theopen box. with the hinged cover away from the observer and the open boxcloser to the observer, cores shall be arranged in descending sequencebeginning at the upper left end of the partition farthest from the observer andcontinuing in the other partitions from left to right to the right hand cornerclose to the observer. The highest core shall be placed in Box 1, and lowerportions of the core shall be placed in the other boxes in consecutive order.All cores shall be photographed with a folding rule or measuring tapetemporarily placed lengthwise along the edge of the box so that core piecelengths may be readily discerned. The photographs shall clearly illustrate thecondition of the core, and the identification labels and marks outlined insubparagraph (a), above. Copies of photographs of all cores recovered onthe PROJECT shall be included in the final report.

c) Test Samples

Rock samples selected for testing shall be preserved by wrapping withplastic membrane and sealing to avoid moisture loss, or by other methodssubject to the approval of the COMPANY. Preserved samples shall beproperly positioned in the core box and identified with a tag or label asrequired in subparagraph (1), above.

F. Care and Deliverv of Samples

The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for preserving all samples in hispossession in good condition. The CONTRACTOR shall keep samples fromfreezing, from undue exposure to the weather and sun, and shall keep alldescriptive labels and designations on sample jars, bags, and boxes clean andlegible. Samples shall be delivered within the time limits specified for each type ofinvestigation. In general, no sample shall remain at the WORK SITE for more thanone week after beinq taken. Samples shall be retained by the CONTRACTOR athis laboratory for a period of not less than ninety (90) days following submittal ofthe final report. The CONTRACTOR may then either destroy the samples, or makedelivery to the COMPANY if so directed by the COMPANY.

G. F re i9.b!lD..9

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for freighting all samples for whichlaboratory testing is required as specified in the SERVICE ORDER. This includestransportation to the CONTRACTOR's laboratory and may include commercialfreighting to other laboratories if required for tests, which the CONTRACTORcannot perform in his laboratory or within the time frame of the SERVICE ORDER.

H. Supplementarv Subsurface Exploration

Subsurface exploration, that is abandoned or from which unsatisfactory samplesare being obtained, shall be supplemented by other exploration adjacent to theoriginal, in order that satisfactory samples or the required information is obtained.Penetration to abandonment depth or to the depths where unsatisfactory sampleswere obtained, may be made by any methods selected by the CONTRACTOR that

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA



49

i-~uQ

~Q

~u

z0;:"-

0:uCJ)'"Q

0z '" M

REVISIONS

I'''E''ARE!) 'IV, ~DATE, ~. 2012-09-26CIIK~V' v

AI'I""'V>:!)

EHV-E&oDENG. SUPPORT D'V.

(dI/CSM

2012-09-26

OHRAT'NG DEPA"TMENT

~

DATE, "112-09-26

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORoERING

MATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4~ ~J~\ A.s~\

in the opinion of the COMPANY will permit satisfactory completion. No additionalpayment will be made for supplementary subsurface explorations that are requiredto replace those abandoned or from which satisfactory samples were not obtainedbecause of mechanical failure of equipment, negligence on the part of theCONTRACTOR, or other preventable causes for which the CONTRACTOR isresponsible. Payment will be made for acceptable portions of these supplementarysubsurface explorations below the depths or outside the reaches of the previouslyaccepted WORK.

2.04 EXPLORATION - OPEN EXCAVATION AND SAMPLING METHODS

- A. Test Pits and Samllil!Jg

1) Definition

A test pit will be any excavation in soil, decomposed rock, or overburden, whichhas an open cross-section area large enough to permit efficient excavation,engineering inspection, and undisturbed sampling. Test pit excavations will notbe continued below the water table.

2) Equipment and Supplies

The equipment and supplies shall include suitable backhoes, picks, shovels,and sampling tools. Backhoes used for all test pitting shall be capable ofdigging pits to depths specified in the SERVICE ORDER. Supplies, which theCONTRACTOR shall furnish for obtaining undisturbed samples, shall includesplit metal cylinders complete with bolts and nuts for tightening, and/or boltedmetal or wooden boxes of acceptable size and types. The minimum insidedimensions of tightened cylinders shall be 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter by300 mm (12 inches) in length and the cubic boxes, shall have 250 mm (10inches) dimensions. Accessories to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR shallinclude a small sample trimming shovel or spade, hatchet, trimming knife,paraffin and facilities for melting and brush application, trowels, labels, boxesfor shipping samples, and lumber for shoring test pits. The CONTRACTORshall furnish bags with ties and tags for containing disturbed samples.

3) Procedures

a) Excavation

Excavation shall conform to the requirements of the COMPANY SafetyManual, Part 3, Section 1-307, "Excavation and Trenches".

b) Undisturbed Samplinq

In obtaining undisturbed samples from test pits, the undisturbed naturalphysical and structural characteristics of the samples of in-situ material shallbe preserved insofar as possible both while samples are being taken and



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.I

REV.


49

'"'0:'"U SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~..\~\ ~y1J1"~"'

0z .... .... -

during shipment to the point of testing. In cohesive and partially cohesivesoils, this may be accomplished by isolating the soil column or cube to besampled by gently trenching around it and knife-trimming it to the requireddimensions of the split cylinder or box. A thin coating of melted paraffin shallthen be applied quickly, but gently, to the sample with a paint brush, to seal itagainst loss of moisture. The metal or wooden sample container, with boltstightened shall then be placed over the paraffin coated sample and allclearances between the sample and the walls of the container filled withmelted paraffin. After the paraffin has hardened, the soil column or cubeshall be cut-off a few inches below the container, the sample and containerinverted and removed from the pit, and the sample trimmed at the base. Abrush coating of paraffin shall then be applied to the exposed portion. Whereoverburden materials to be sampled are only partially cohesive, it is best notto isolate the soil column for its full length before paraffining and lowering thecontainer. By exposing and paraffining small sections at a time, andprogressively lowering the container, the sample will be subjected to lessdisturbance. Where natural moisture content is an important factor, delayshall be avoided in taking the sample, in order that the natural moisturecontent of the material may be retained to the fullest extent.

c) Disturbed samplinq

"'":tU

z0i=..Q:u'"'"Q

REVISIONS

I'RI:I'ARF,O lW, Y()An:, !I'.0'.'"

CIIK'()ay,

AI'I'RUV!:()

ElIV.F,&1)1)ENG. SlII'I'OIn IHV.

CSM

Disturbed samples shall be taken from the side walls of the test pit. The sizeof the disturbed samples shall be adequate for the quantity of materialsrequired for the types of laboratory tests outlined in the SERVICE ORDER.Sample containers may be cloth or burlap bags or, if moisture loss is to beminimized, heavy duty plastic bags. In any case, the strength of the bagsmust be sufficient to resist tearing or splitting during handling of thecontained samples. All bags must contain an inside label and an outside tagshowing pertinent information as required for Soil Classification Samples.

d) Disposition of Samples

rW

'012.0'.'"

OPERATING ()EI'ARTMENT

DATE, '012.0'.'

Cylindrical and box samples shall be packed in dry packing and freighted insturdy wooden boxes of strength and construction sufficient to guaranteeagainst damage during shipment. Boxes should be no larger than is requiredfor freighting two such samples. Both box samples and boxed cylindricalsamples shall be marked "FRAGILE - HANDLE WITH CARE" and shall beidentified by labels, similar to those for Undisturbed Samples taken fromborings, attached to inside and outside of each box. The CONTRACTORshall avoid exposing sealed and crated samples to extremes of temperature.Undisturbed Samples permitted to freeze, even partially, shall be replaced bythe CONTRACTOR at his expense. The CONTRACTOR shall not hold thesesamples at the site of exploration for a period in excess of one (1) week.

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USEI) FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORI)ERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIEI) ANI) I)ATED

B. Test Trenches and SamQ!io.g

1) Definition

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

.IOB ORDER NO.

PLANT NOJ INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. I PAGENO.19

lA IAPPENDIX. XVII OF 0

49

,.:a:'"U

0

~"'

0'":tU

z0i=0..;:Uvo'"'Q

0z

'" N

REVISIONS

rRErAln:D 'n', ~AAOI

~~

DATE' --, - 2012-09-26

CII DBY,

API'ROVED

EHV-E&I)I)ENG. SUPPORT DIV.

CJtI/CSM

21112-09-26

OPERATING DEI'ARTMENT

DATE, ""'-09-'"

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO IIF: USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDF:RINGMATF:RIALS UNTILCERTlFIF:D AND DATF:D

.lOB ORDER NO.

-

2.05

2.06

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~L:~ ~.)~\ A.sy1j\

A test trench will be any excavation in soil, decomposed rock or overburdenwith a cross-section equal to the width of a bulldozer blade. Test trenches willnot be continued below the water table.

2) Equipment and Supplies

The equipment and supplies shall include suitable bulldozers, hand tools andsampling equipment. Test trenches, which are to be dug to refusal, shall beexcavated using a bulldozer equivalent to a Caterpillar Model 0-9 rated at 385HP off the flywheel with a dozer blade and a single tooth ripper. Supplies, whichthe CONTRACTOR shall furnish for obtaining undisturbed samples, shall be aslisted in "Test Pits and Sampling".

3) Procedures

a) Excavation shall conform to the requirements of the company Safety Manual,Part 3, Section 1-307, "Excavation and Trenches".

b) Sampling shall be as specified in "Test Pits and Sampling".

C. Testing

Testing of materials exposed by excavation shall be performed as directed by theCOMPANY. Testing may include any of the WORK described in Section 2.07,Standards for In-Situ Field Testing and Instrumentation, subparagraphs A, S, C, H,K and L. The payment for such field testing shall be exclusive of payment for testpit and/or trenches, based on the established unit price for each test.

EXPLORATION - CONE PENETRATION TEST METHODS

The scope, definitions, apparatus, procedure, special techniques, precautions,precision, accuracy and report shall be in accordance with ASTM 03441, "Deep, Quasi- Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soil". The equipment shall becapable of exerting 100 kg/cm2 pressure on a standard cone tip.

EXPLORATION - GEOPHYSICAL METHODS

The scope, definitions, and procedures for geophysical explorations shall be in generalaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the apparatus used by theCONTRACTOR for each type of test. The type of apparatus and auxiliary equipment,special techniques, precautions, precision, accuracy and report shall be subject toapproval by the COMPANY and shall be in general accordance with the followingrequirements for each type of test. The type of apparatus and auxiliary equipment,special techniques, precautions, precision, accuracy and report shall be subject toapproval by the COMPANY and shall be in general accordance with the followingrequirements for each type of test.

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

"f;3uQ

~~

Q'"'"u

~>="-

c;:uCJ)'"Q

0z .., N

REVISIONS

P"EPARE!)HY, I~!)AlT, 2012.09.26

CIIKII)HV,

AP"IH)Vt:I)

EBV.F,&IJI)ENC. SIH'PORT I)IV.

cdtICSM

2012.09.26

OPERATING !)EPARTMENT

!)ATE, 2012.09.26

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FOR

CONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERING

MATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.lOB ORDEI~ NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~..I~I ~y1j\

A. RefractionSeismic Testing

1) ~ment

The apparatus used for refraction seismic testing shall be of the hammer-impactsensitive type similar to the Nimbus Enhancement Seismograph Model ES-125or the Bison Model 1575 B, Automatic Signal Enhancement Seismograph.Accessory equipment shall include a Strip Chart Recorder, Vertical Geophone,Horizontal Geophone, as well as hammers, cables, switches, and other itemsrequired for the performance of a complete seismic refraction traverse having alength of at least 100 meters.

- 2) Procedures

Refraction surveys will be conducted in accordance with the proceduresrecommended for the equipment being used, and shall provide a precision andaccuracy of data as required for evaluation of strata changes within a maximumdepth of 30 meters. Hammer impact points, generally, should not be fartherapart than 3 meters and the spacing should be reduced, where necessary, toaccurately delineate changes in seismic velocity of subsurface materials.Elevation of ground surface shall be determined at each impact point relative toa bench mark elevation provided by the COMPANY's Survey Division or to thecenter of traverse at an assumed elevation of 100.000 meters. Double traverse(forward and reverse) shall be performed at each location to evaluate strata dipand subsurface irregularities. Right angle double traverses and/or radialtraverses may be required as directed by the COMPANY. Seismic velocity at agiven impact point shall be based on the cumulative average of "first arrival"wave time for three or more hammer blows.

3) Records

When a clear wave pattern is developed for "first arrival" wave time, the timeshall be recorded in the field notes for the traverse. When the "first arrival" isquestionable, the wave pattern shall be reproduced on the Strip ChartRecorder. Field notes and computations shall be recorded on forms describedin the following subparagraph 6.A.4. Records and copies shall be provided tothe COMPANY as required therein. If voluminous, The records may bepresented in a separate volume of the final report.

4) Analvsis and reports

Analysis of field data shall generally conform to the procedures and techniquesdescribed in "The Handbook of Engineering Geophysics", Bison Instruments,Inc., Minneapolis, Minnesota, USA. When field data is voluminous, thecomputer program for analysis of the multiple-dipping-Iayer structure describedin Chapter 12 of the Handbook, may be used. Reports shall include time-distance plots showing average arrival time from each impact point, "best fit"velocity and depth for each stratum, dip and top of rock irregularities. Wherepossible, evaluation of subsurface materials should be correlated with


GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONANDMATERIAL TESTING

SAUDI ARABIA



49

"'"'"uQ

~-<

Q

'<

u

z0;::"-

;;:u'"""Q

0z M N

REVISIONS

P"EPARED BV, ~DATE' 2012-09-26

Cllk"t) BV,

AI'PROVED

EHV-E&DDENC. SUPpORT "IV.

(iJ/CSM

2012-09-26


CElnlFIED

OAT'" 2012-09-26

THIS "RAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FOR

CONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTIL

CERTIFIED AND DATED

.IOB ORDER NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~L:~ ~J~I ~~\

subsurface conditions encountered in test borings or exposed in naturaloutcrops or man-made excavations.

B. Cross-Hole Seismic Testing

1) Obiective and Principle

This test shall be used to determine compression (P) and shear (S) wavevelocities through subsurface materials at various depths for estimation ofphysical characteristics and engineering parameters of the materials.

The principle consists of recording the time it takes for a particular type of sonicwave to travel a known distance between the impulse originating in oneborehole and the signal receiving device, geophone, in another borehole. Thesignal received by geophone is amplified, displayed and enhanced by a remoteseismograph on the ground surface.

2) ~ment

The apparatus used for cross-hole seismic testing shall be of the hammerimpact sensitive type similar to the signal enhancement seismograph OYOMSBIS-150. Accessory equipment shall include a Strip Chart Recorder, VerticalGeophone, hammer, cables, switches and other items required for theperformance of cross-hole seismic testing.

3) Procedures

At present, there is no ASTM or other Industry Standard available for this test.Until such a Standard becomes available, the following test procedure shallgenerally be followed:

a) The receiver hole shall be drilled, sampled and cased to the maximumdesired depth of the cross-hole test.

b) The impulse hole shall be drilled a distance of three to five meters away toabout 1.5 meters depth. The drill rod shall then be detached from the rigand a steel anvil shall be screwed on the rod.

c) The rod shall be struck with a sledge hammer, creating an impulse thattravels down the rod and into the soil, and also initiating the time base inthe seismograph.

d) The impulse shall be detected by a geophone, placed at the same depthas the end of the rod in the receiver hole, and relayed in electronic signalto the seismograph.

e) The seismograph shall display the wave pattern sensed by the geophoneon its cathode ray tube screen.



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

,.:~u"t~""u

z0i="-

i:2uen'"Q

0z

'" N

REVISIONS

PREPARED 'IV, K1>An;, 012-0'-'"

CHK'n BY,

APPROVED

EIW-E&DDENG. SUI'I'ORT DlV.

(1Lt/CSM

'012-0'-'"

OPERATING D£PAlnMENT

CERTIFIED

BY'~~~DATE, '0'H'-'"

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO B~: USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDICRINGMA TERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:.4.J+S..U~..I~\ ~y13\

f) This pattern shall be shown to the scale of a preselected time base suchthat the time from the original impulse to the time of the impulse arrival forvarious waves can be measured,

g) Knowing the travel time and travel distance, the wave velocities at thatparticular depth shall be computed,

h) The drill rod shall be advanced to a greater depth and the aboveprocedure repeated,

4) Records

-When a clear pattern is developed for the first arrival time of the various waves,the time shall be recorded in the field notes, When the first arrival times arequestionable, the wave pattern shall be reproduced on the Strip ChartRecorder, Records and copies shall be provided to the COMPANY,

5) Analyses and Reports

Field data shall be analyzed to determine compression (P) and shear (S) wavevelocities and estimate there from the physical and engineering characteristicsof the materials, Reports shall include time-distance plots showing averagearrival time for the two waves from each impact point, best fit velocities anddepth for each test. Where possible, evaluation of subsurface materials shouldbe correlated with subsurface conditions encountered in test borings orexposed in natural outcrops or man-made excavations,

c. Electrical Resistivity

The apparatus and accessory equipment used for evaluation of subsurfaceconditions, based on the apparent electrical Resistivity, shall be comparable to theSoil Test R-40C Resistivity Meter with a sensitivity adequate for evaluation ofmaterials to a depth of 30 meters, The scope, definitions, procedure, specialtechniques and precautions, report and precision and accuracy shall be inaccordance with ASTM G-57, "Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using theWenner Four-Electrode Method", Analysis of field data shall generally conform tothe procedures and techniques described in "Earth Resistivity Manual", Soil Test,Inc" Evanston, Illinois, U,S,A., and the results shall be presented as describedtherein,

2.07 STANDARDS FOR IN-SITU FIELD TESTING AND INSTRUMENTATION

A. Dry Unit Weiqht and Moisture Content

In accordance with any of the standard test procedures described in:1) ASTM 01556 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method

2) ASTM 02167 Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber-BalloonMethod

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO, NO,I

REV.


49

;.:"'"uQ~."Q

~u

z01='"'"u'"'"Q

0z .... M

REVISIONS

"RE"ARED 'IV, ~OAn:, '"12-(1'-'"

CIIKJI'> RY,

APPROYED

EHY-E&IJI)ENG. SUI'I'OIIT DIY.

CIJI/CSM

'(112-(1'-".

OPERATING DEPARTM':"'''

k_07LR~~~DATE,'(112-(1'-".

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USEIJ FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORIJERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTlFIEIJ ANIJ IJA TEIJ

.JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:.4~~..\~\ ~~I

3) ASTM 02922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place byNuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

Density of Soil In-Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method4) ASTM 02937

The method used shall be clearly indicated for each test result presented in thefinal report.

B. Moisture Content Direct

In accordance with ASTM D3017, "Moisture Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)".

- C. Plate Bearinq Tests

In Accordance with ASTM 01194, "Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load onSpread Footings", except that dial gages accurate to 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) shallbe used to measure deflections. The Unit Rate for this item shall includemobilization/demobilization charges.

D. Full Scale Spread Footinq Load Tests

In general accordance with ASTM 01194. For each specific case, theCONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY the test set up, the equipment to beused, the step by step procedure and the final report format. Tests will not bestarted until these documents are reviewed and approved by the COMPANY.Testing equipment shall be capable of exerting maximum test load up to 2700 kN(=300 tons). Mobilization/Demobilization for this item shall be paid as a separatepay item.

E. Pile Load Test

Mobilization/Demobilization for the following tests shall be paid as a separate payitem:

1) Compression Load Test

In accordance with ASTM 01143, "Piles under Axial Compressive Load",except that the ASTM 01143 (Figure 1) loading method of jacking againsthold-down piles shall not be used where dead-load reaction is feasible- Theequipment shall be capable of applying a maximum test load of up to 1800 kN(=200 tons).

2) Tension Load Test

In accordance with ASTM 03689, "Individual Piles Under Static Axial TensileLoad". The equipment shall be capable of applying a maximum test load of upto 900 kN (=100 tons)-

3) Lateral Load Test

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA



49

..:'"'"uQ

::"'Q~v

z01=...C2U<J>'"Q

0z .., N

REVISIONS

PREl'ARmBV, I~

DATE, 2012-09-26

C,,)t'"DBV,

APPROVI:I)

EHV.E&DDENC. SUPPORT DIV.

tL/Y'CSM

2012-09-26

OPERATING DEI'ARTMENT

DATE, '012-09-26

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USEI> FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORI>ERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED ANI) I>ATEI>

.1011 ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY ~4~ ~..I~I ~y:J1

In accordance with ASTM D3966, "Piles Under Lateral Loads". The equipmentshall be capable of applying maximum test load of up to 900 kN (=100 tons).

4) Inclined Tension Load Test

This test will generally be applicable to foundations of transmission line towerswhere the stub angle is embedded in foundation concrete at an angle to thevertical. In the absence of a directly related ASTM Standard, the test shall beperformed in general accordance with ASTM D3689, except as modifiedhereafter.

-The testing assembly shall be capable of applying a maximum tensile load of1100 kN (=125 tons) in a direction axial to the stub angle at a tower footing.The test loads shall be transmitted to the ground through the test frameresting on leveling pads on the ground.

Horizontal and vertical movements shall be measured during the test at aminimum of three locations on the footing. The movement of the stub angleshall be measured at two locations. The dial gages for measuring movementsshall be either 0.076 mm (0.003) in.) per division or 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) perdivision, as necessary for accurate assessment of movement. Electronic loadcells shall be used to measure the applied load by the jacks. These cells shallbe accurate to about 890 N (200 Ibs.), and shall be calibrated before and afterthe tests are performed.

Loads shall be applied in maximum increments of 45 kN (=5 tons). Each loadshall be held for a minimum of about 15 minutes, or until the movement ratebecomes less than 0.254 mm (0.01 in.) per hour. Load shall be raised todesign load and held for at least 6 hours. Unloading shall be done in threeequal decrements. Each decrement shall be held until the rate of movement isless than 0.254 mm (0.01 in.) per hour. Readings during loading andunloading shall be taken at time intervals of 30 seconds, 1, 2, 4, 8, 15, 30minutes and one hour as necessary. The final readings after unloading shallbe taken immediately and 2 hours after all the load has been removed. Theabove procedure shall be repeated by reloading the foundation to failure or toa maximum specified test load and then unloading in three decrements.

The report shall present load-movement curve for each test together with theestimated failure load. The observed mode of failure shall also be described.

F. Ground Water Observations and Permeability Tests

1) Piezometer Installation and Observation

Will be directed primarily towards evaluation of "static" water levels andpossible seasonal variations thereof, as recorded by water levels measured inobservation wells. The Piezometers shall be of the stand pipe type, utilizingperforated PVC pipe, plastic filter screens and selected backfill materials



SAUDI ARABIA


IAPPENDIX- XVII25

A OF 0

49

,..:5uQ

~~

Q

'"u

zc1="-

;;:Uen'"'Q

0z '" M

REVISIONS

PRF.PARF.D IIV, yDATr" 21112-119-2"

('IIKIt> IIV,

APPROVED

EHV-E&IH)ENG, SUPPORT ()IV,

wCSM

21112-119.2.

OPF.RATING DF.PARTMF.NT

CERTIFIED

))

'Hn:, ""'-"9-'"


.lOB ORDER NO,

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~~~ ~J~\ ~,y1j\

installed in drilled holes as shown on Plates 11-3and 11-4.The installation andobservation shall be in accordance with Chapter 1.10, Ground WaterInvestigation, "Foundation Engineering Handbook", Winterhorn and Fang, VanNostrand Reinhold Co. 1975. Piezometers may be installed in test borings,subject to the approval of the COMPANY, or in special holes drilled forinstallation of Piezometers. In either case, drilling of the hole will be a separatepay item or items.

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.!

REV.


49

;.:'""'v

Q

~Q'"G

z01=0.C2UU)"'Q

0z

REVISIONS

A"PROVED

EHV.E&DDENc. SUPPORT !)IV,

dIUCSM

2012.11'-26

OI'ERATlNG DEPARTMENT

DATE, "112.0,.2(,

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR OImERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTlFlF.n ANn nATF.n

.JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY ~4~ ~j,y...J\~y.!iJ\

THREAD,[QiST[[LCAP'~iITHI.liEL't'jE'i"j H~4:0~i\IPi DU) Ln-! 'li

l~ o1,;r., eFL-H' M!~h Vi!'!1..I ,,-,,,,r.,-",' "', /"""'"

~' // ~l~,,,' i'

I,'

,

',

' J'r(~T~Jil,

'~,

" ",i~i,

1,

'

,

1 r,:,'i,~ D i\'

,

.Tr3,

'

TE'!'

,

'I," ~u, ',' ".HITE",.."".J!..H, ,,...,4.,,*, ." ', r ",,1 'E", 'IT

HOLErtn.lrM~TE[J. m~ tAJi, 1NB;LtlCKiPtI]}H

"'t'

~~

P]PEf~Srnrn].I}. MINJ.J

~,~ t..,!~~ O,

r GROUrliD

~IC.".. ' I " ,,'''-' ," "~'-''''-'-''

,~

~'

GA'OI.H

STEEL Ct!SD~4:GH00mm 1.0. ~m~.~

4:2~('I$

TEMPEt! UJE~H)t,;n:TEPELLETS

~ "

Q f.>:':'1

LL~Q

Q~L.1J':::t

~~Q-;; L.1J

tI:1l:;

q:qJ

I. pi~;CPlfiE SHALL HAi.lE A ~tIN.1.0. iQF(~jFfIf'fl.

, [H"'TTCiY E~;,n r~F P_', '~!f' 'if ELL.Sf~r EN, -t::H,! LL,_. p,,,,..rc- "',"" ~ ',"" ..,.~.."t. -- "

BE. Pt UlG.GEO.

3. ONE 31f'iffiJ "ErH H()LE. SHpl L 'BE ,(lR]LLE~)It~ THE CAS]Ni~ 15.mJmBELf'~ THEBOTHUA {jIF 1HE t~P.

if.. PROTEC111~'EPIPE, LOCt~. AtitiGROlllTREOmAEOFOR!\LL U'i1$TALLA110~~$E~

.'r

.

-Ef\!.'''1 TH,n

.";';'

.

:'E r.7'IE~.

'

It'ti.Iil.'

.

"lE(.

'-i.. .;.;;:-

.~. .TE~i!~f..'.][qj~VI"'" r "',~ '.,.",. ,}!,,"",...,} '1IIf",,,,I1.H'.I .

5. .~ - iktETErtSmm - MllLli.4ETERS

.,:.\tt~ PEA GiRA\'"ELtS~4ALL[S-TCI)NsmUENT

MUST~E NOSMALLE~THANwELLSCREE.~5t O'TOF MESH;'

,~.

Pv'C ¥tELL SC~:EEN

PLA TE l[ -3.

TI'1'l ii L JiL.\T-flTHT1'! ,~>:irT "'I";'E r;'F "'r'!i!:I E\j,t"! !'l.l'!J 'u';" ill :!.L V 'L.'u\" .

if - MAY BE ALTHI£D; FCtR SITE C;O~m.ITIa{rfS

r.

':JI' E 1n~1ETE I.;~

.-t;, D') ET. n.'~IL - '~

..IN.

G L E Ir"~J(.T8L L lj Tl f.

'

)~'r ;L..!..' J',\ :' \ "". .' .H.. ,,J ., '''''' . ';j, .: i"'1 ""I"~



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°iINDEX

I DOGUMENTNO. NOJREV.

27lA IAPPENDIX-XVII OF 0

49

"::;u

0

~~

0:.:z:u

z01=0-2u<IJ...0

0z

REVISIONS

,'REPARED BV,

DATE'~ 1on-ll9.,.C~BV' V

APP"OVEO

EHY.E&DDENG. SUPI'ORT DIY.

CSM

20n-ll'.'.

OrEllAllNG DEPARTMENT

~~BY, "OIlAM''''D ,\t.-SAFFAR

DATE, ,",,-",.,

THIS DI\AWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ ~y1J1

'>;;t:s.-. M!'!JTE it:. .C:-EE :j1'L'~ TE II-~rc, J '! R .,J

T~J,~PEO~ITE PELLETS ~~'.5~O

ply'C PH'E

PEA GRAvEL[SMALLESTCONSTITUENTMU5TBENu $~A.A1LH1 THAN WELL

SCREENSLOT OF MESH~

P\i'C '«ELL SCREE~

APPROXiMATE3.0MTEIMPEDBENTONITEPELLETS

~l!t P"'TPE. ~ >J .1.

PEA G~MJELt AS AEH)vE

PVC WEll SCREEN

PLATE 11-4PIEZOMETER DETAil - MULTIPLEINSTALLATIONS

ROUNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.

28lA IAPPENDIX -XVII OF 0

49

,.:'"'""

~.,'"'"'""

z01="-

Q1u'"'"Q

0z .., M

REVISIONS

I'REI'ARED IIV, ~nAn:, '"12-"9-2(,

vCIIK>!\BY,

AI'I'ROYEI>

EHY-E&I!I!ENG. SUPPORT my.

(dtICSM

'"12-""-'6

OI'ERATI~G nEI'ARTMENT

' "

nATE, 1111?!19-'6

TillS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.1011 ORJ)ER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~l.:a~ ~J~I 4..s~\

2) Permeabilitv TestinQ

Shall be limited to falling-head type testing conducted in suitably cased boreholes, or in standpipes or Piezometers contained in adequately backfilled boreholes. General procedures shall be in accordance with the reference cited insubparagraph (1), preceding.

G. Electrical Resistivity

-

Where definitive values of electrical resistivity of subsurface materials are requiredfor analysis of grounding problems for COMPANY structures, the field tests will beconducted in accordance with ASTM G57, Rev. A, "Field Measurement of SoilResistivity Using the Wenner Four Electrode Method", as also required in Section2.06.C for geophysical exploration.

H. Thermal Resistivity

In accordance with IEEE* 442, "Soil Thermal Resistivity Measurements", an outlineof the procedure is described herein: Insert the probe into a soil mass and allowthe probe to come into thermal equilibrium with the soil. An electrical current isthen passed through the heating element causing temperature rises in the interiorof the probe. A thermocouple inside the probe measures the heat rise andreadings are taken at intervals measured by a stopwatch. The time temperaturedata reduction is done then by graphical means. More sophisticated data reductionprocedures may be adopted by the CONTRACTOR upon COMPANY's approval.Supplementary soil data (e.g., in-situ soil density and moisture content) shall beobtained as directed by the COMPANY.

I. Field Vane Shear Test

Vane Shear Test shall be in accordance with ASTM 02573, "Method for FieldVane Shear Test in Cohesive Soils",

J. Pressuremeter Test

Pressuremeter testing shall be in accordance with ASTM 04719, "Standard TestMethod for Pressuremeter Testing in Soils".

K. PercolationTest

In accordance with the ARAMCO Sanitary Code, Section IX-B, 9.18.4.

L. Other Considerations

Certain other Standards, which shall be observed in the performance of fieldWORK but do not represent separate pay items include:

1) General Field Procedures - in accordance with ASTM 0420, "Investigating andSampling Soil and Rock for Engineering Purposes".

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTNOJ INDEX I DOCUMENTNO. PAGENO. REV.


49

;-:~u

Q

~"'

Q:.

u

z01=0.2u'"'"Q

0z .., N

REVISIONS

"«EI'AREJ)'''' U--!"ATI;, 2012-tt9-2('

Cllt(." BY,

APPROYEJ)

[IIV-E&""ENG- SUppORT IJIV.

ciJt/CSM

2ttl2-tt')-2('

OI'ERATlNG "EP,\RTMENT

"ATE, 2012-09-'

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USEI> FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ ~y1!1

2) Visual Classification of Soil - field evaluation of soil classification based onASTM D2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes", and ASTMD2488, "Descriptions of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures), or ASTM D3282,"Classification of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway ConstructionPurposes", as directed by the COMPANY.

2.08 FIELD RECORDS

-

The CONTRACTOR shall keep accurate subsurface logs and records of all field workaccomplished under this CONTRACT and shall deliver complete, legible copies ofthese logs and records to the COMPANY upon completion of the WORK or at suchother time or times as he may be directed. All such records shall be preserved in goodcondition and order by the CONTRACTOR until they are delivered and accepted. TheCOMPANY shall have the right to examine such records at any time prior to theirdelivery. Separate logs shall be made for each hole and test pit. The followinginformation shall be included on the logs or in the records for each hole:

A. Hole number or designation and elevation of top hole

B. Make and manufacturer's model designation of test-pit and trench excavation,drilling, and cone testing equipment

C. Type of drilling, sampling, and cone testing operation by depth

D. Dates and time by depths when test-pit and trench excavation, drilling, samplingand cone testing operations were performed

E. Depths at which samples or cores were recovered or attempts made to sample orcore including top and bottom depth of each run.

F. Classification or description by depths of the materials sampled, cored, orpenetrated including a description of moisture conditions and of conditions ofcompactness or stiffness of materials encountered. This classification ordescription shall be made immediately following the taking of the samples or coresand in accordance with ASTM D2487 and ASTM D2488.

G. Penetration and resistance such as drive-hammer blows given in blows per foot orpart thereof for driving sample spoons and casing and as the pressure in poundsper square inch applied to push undisturbed samples

H. Percentage of sample or core recovered per run and RQD value expressed as apercentage

I. Depth at which ground water is encountered. Record Static Water Level and dateat least 24 hours after the hole is finished

J. Depths at which drill water is lost and amounts. Depth and distance of drill roddrops

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICALINVESTIGATIONAND MATERIAL TESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTNOJ INDEX I DOCUMENTNO. I PAGENO. REV.

IAPPENDIX. XVII30

A OF 0

49

'"''"...u

Q

~-<

Q

:.'"u

z01=~C2u'"'"Q

0z .., ...

REVISIONS

PREPAR£D'IV, ~I)An;,A 2012-09-21>

C"~Y' 17

APPROYt:I>

EHV-E&I)I)ENG. SU,','ORT DlV.

att/CSM

2012-09-21>

OPERATING "EPART"ENT

~

"ATE, 10'2-119-'

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOI~ ORDERINGMATRRIALS UNTILCERTlFIRD AND DATRI)

2.09-

2.10

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~..I~\ ~y1J\

K. Depth of bottom of hole

Additionally, records of test data for all field testing shall be provided in accordancewith the Standards specified in Section 2.07. The CONTRACTOR will provide samplecopies of standard forms for each test to the COMPANY for review and approval priorto performance of tests. The presence of a COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE or thekeeping of separate records by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR ofthe responsibility for the WORK specified in this paragraph. Payment will not be madefor any WORK for which the required records have not been furnished by theCONTRACTOR.

LABORATORY TESTING

All samples received in the laboratory shall be inspected and visually classified by anengineer or geologist. The condition of the samples shall be recorded andrepresentative samples suitable for testing shall be selected and stored in a mannerthat will protect the samples from fluctuations in temperature or low humidity.Regardless of the basic purpose or type of test (classification, strength, volumechange), it is not intended that all samples be subjected to testing. Testing should belimited to samples representative of significant subsurface conditions; and, thenumbers and types of test should be limited to those which will contribute to thegeotechnical evaluation of subsurface conditions for the specific PROJECT. Paymentwill not be made for any laboratory testing that represents needless duplication of testdata or that is not related to significant tangible geotechnical considerations or that isnot specifically identified in the approved SERVICE ORDER.

STANDARDS FOR LABORATORY TESTING

Where relevant Standards are applicable, the laboratory WORK shall be conducted inaccordance with the procedures of the American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) or in accordance to such other procedures and Standards delineated orreferenced herein. Where relevant standards are not necessarily applicable, guideStandards are provided. Reference to a specific standard does not necessarilyrepresent a pay item unless so indicated. Standards included in another test procedureor which are required for the general operation of the laboratory (e.g. ASTM D421, "Drypreparation of Soil Samples for Particles Size Analysis and Determination of SoilConstants") are not considered to be separate pay items. Standards for laboratorytesting are as follows:

A. Visual Classification

Evaluation and classification of soil samples according to the criteria provided inASTM D2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" and ASTMD2488, "Description of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures)" or, if directed by theCOMPANY, ASTM D3282, "Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures forHighway Construction Purposes", without benefit of supporting laboratoryclassification test data; and, evaluation and classification of rock samples by

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


.lOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ARABIA



49

;-:r;:u

Q

~~

Q'":t:U

2:0f=0-02u'"'"Q

02: '" N

REVISIONS

PRE"ARED BY' -rJ~

~.~

DATE'

." - 2912.99.2(,Cl 'D lW,

APPROYED

EHV-E&DD':NG. SUPPORT DIV.

wCSM

2912.99.2(,

OPERATING nE"ARTMENT

CE'<TIFlED

BY~~<

DATE, '912-99.2(,

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FOR

CONSTRUCTION OI{FOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ A..:..I~IA..s~\

composition, structure and hardness according to the criteria described in SectionIll: Guidelines for Preparation of Final Logs. Visual classification is not a separatepay item.

B. ClassificationTesting

-

Identification of soil types based on laboratory testing shall not be separate payitem. The cost shall be included in the costs of the various tests required foridentification based on the criteria of ASTM' 02487 or ASTM 03283. Tests shall beassigned by the CONTRACTOR only after review of field data and visualclassification of samples recovered. Sufficient tests shall be performed to confirmor modify visual classifications. Excessive testing, where definite visualclassification is possible, shall be avoided. Testing shall be done primarily onmaterials, which are borderline and are difficult to classify. A soils sample would beML-CL or SP-SM. Classification tests shall include:

1) Particle -Size Analysis/Mechanical

In accordance with ASTM 0422, "Particle-Size Analysis of Soils", but notincluding hydrometer analysis

2) Particle-Size Analvsis/Hvdrometer

In accordance with ASTM 0422, "Particle-Size Analysis of Soils", plusdetermination of specific gravity but not including sieve analysis

3) Percent Finer Than the #200, U.S. Standard Sieve

In accordance with ASTM 01140

4) Plasticity

Determination of the Plasticity Index based on the results of tests performed inaccordance with ASTM 04318, "Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Indexof Soils"

C. Index Properties Testinq

Tests include those required to group soils in major strata and to provide a basisfor evaluation of the structural characteristics utilizing a restricted number of"Structural Properties Tests" described in subparagraph 0, following. Indexproperties tests required as a part of any other standard laboratory test procedure(as in subparagraph B.2, above) are not pay items. When performedindependently of other test procedures, payment will be made on the basis of theactual tests performed. Tests are to be assigned after evaluation of field data andas needed for extrapolation of other laboratory test data. Index properties testsinclude:

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTNOJ INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. I PAGEN°'I REV.32

A I APPENDIX - XVII OF I 0

49

;-:1::u

Q

::.,Q'"u

z0f::"-

02uen'"'Q

0z

'" M

REVISIONS

P"[PAREDBY, I~D

.

AT[, ~. 2012-09-26

CI~Y' -.

APP"OYEI)

EtlV.E&1)1)ENG. SUI'!'ORT I)IV.

I1IL/CSM

2012.09.26


!

DATE, '012-09-26

THIS ORAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.JOB ORDER NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~..\~\ ~y1j\

1) Moisture content

In accordance with ASTM D2216, "Laboratory Determination of Water(Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures".

2) Drv Unit Weiqht and Moisture Content

No standard test procedure. Test to be performed on Undisturbed SoilSamples, Denison Samples or Rock Core with unaltered natural volume.Determine total dry weight of a sample of measured total volume, computeand provide Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content.

3) Specific Gravitv

Testing generally limited to materials finer than the #4, U.S. standard sieve inaccordance with ASTM D854, "Specific Gravity of Soils", unless otherwisedirected by the COMPANY. Reported specific gravity shall be based on theaverage of tests performed on three specimens of the same sample.

4) Natural Relative Density

Natural dry unit weights expressed as Relative Density based on maximumand minimum densities, subparagraph E(2), following. Computation of relativedensity is not a separate pay item.

D. Structural Properties Testinq

Tests performed only on Undisturbed Soil Samples, Denison Samples or RockCore. The test program shall be planned for analysis of specific design problemsand testing limited to specimens obtained from carefully selected high qualitysamples. Tests performed on mediocre samples will not be accepted or paid for bythe COMPANY. Rigid standardization of test procedures is not appropriate forthese tests. The test procedures described in: Lambe, "Soil Testing for Engineers"(Ref. 1) and/or ASTM, "Procedures for Testing Soils (Ref. 2) are considered to beappropriate with variations as described below:

1) Permeability

Generally limited to the Constant Head Procedure (Ref. 2) on clean, coarsegrained soils having less than ten percent (10%) finer than #200 U.S. standardsieve. Test procedures described in ASTM D2434, "Permeability of GranularSoils (Constant Head)", may be used as a guide.

2) Unconfined ComQression

Generally in accordance with the procedures outlined in Ref. 1. ASTM D2166,"Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil", may be used as aguide. Trimming of specimens should be limited to "Squaring" of the ends (ifcapping is not appropriate). Reduction of specimen diameter by trimming is


GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONANDMATERIALTESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.I

REV.


49

"::\u

Q

~Q'":cu

;z;0

t02uVi'"'Q

0;z;

'" N

REVISIONS

I'RF,I'ARF,() BY, ~ I

IW~'F,'" ,012.09.'"

C" ) ''',

AI'I'IWYF,()

EHV.E&DDENG. SUI'I'ORT DIY.

ttLt/CSM

,012.09.'"

OI'ERATING nEI'AlnMENT

nATE, 20' 2.09.?(,


.JOB ORDER NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~..\~I ~~\

not acceptable. Ratio of specimen height to diameter should be less thanthree and greater than two.

3) Triaxial Compression

Generally in accordance with Ref. 1 and limitations on specimen trimming andspecimen sizes as described above for unconfined compression; and, triaxialchambers and test platens must be of size to accommodate the specimenswithin these limitations. Triaxial tests to be paid for on a per test basis; eitheras one of a series of tests at different confining pressures or as individual testsat confining pressures approximately equal to "at-rest" lateral earth pressuresfor the in-situ condition. The procedures described in ASTM 02850,"Unconsolidated, Undrained Strength of Cohesive Soils in TriaxialCompression", are generally adequate for that type of test. Consolidated,undrained testing, with pore water pressure readings, as described in Ref. 1will be required on all specimens tested at confining pressures comparable toearth pressure.

4) Direct Shear

Generally limited to tests on cohesionless soils or to consolidated shear testson fine grained soils. Test procedures generally as described in either Ref. 1or Ref. 2. Consolidated shear test procedures outlined in ASTM 03080,"Direct Shear Test of Soils", may be used as a guide.

5) Elastic Moduli of Rock

In general accordance with ASTM 03148, "Elastic Moduli of Rock CoreSpecimens in Unaxial Compression".

6) Consolidation

Test procedures generally as described in Ref. 1 or Ref. 2, except thatindividual loads may be maintained for more than 24 hours if secondarycompression is a consideration. Test procedures outlined in ASTM 02435,"One-Dimensional Consolidation Properties of Soils", may be used as a guide.Test will be paid for on a per-increment-of-Ioading basis.

7) EXQansion Pressure

Specimen preparation and equipment as required in (6) above. Maximumpressure required to maintain zero volume change for 24 hours followingsaturation to be determined.

E. Compaction TestinqTest to be performed on disturbed bulk soil samples representative of significantmaterials. Structural properties tests may be assigned as required for geotechnicalevaluation of proposed construction and will be paid for separately fromcompaction testing. Compaction tests, standards, and variations are as follows:

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

'"'1:3u SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:.4~ ~J~I 4..s~\Q

~."Q

~u1) Modified Compaction

2:01="-02u'"to>Q

In accordance with ASTM 01557, "Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 4.54 kg (10 Ibs) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) Drop",Method "0"; but, compacted specimens shall not be re-used for successivecompaction determinations unless authorized by the COMPANY.

2) Maximum and Minimum Densities

02:

.., M -

In accordance with ASTM 04253, "Maximum Index Density of Soils Using aVibratory Table", and ASTM 04254, "Minimum Index Density of Soils andCalculation of Relative Density". These test methods are applicable to soils thatmay contain up to 15%, by weight, of soil particles passing a No. 200 sieve,provided they still have cohesion less, free draining characteristics.

REVISIONS

PREPARED BY, ~-DAn:, .L~CII~Y' '(,

3) California Bearinq Ratio (CBR)

tll//

In accordance with ASTM 01883, "Bearing Ratio of Laboratory CompactedSoils", and sample compaction performed as specified in subparagraph (1),Modified Compaction, above, except that compaction energy will be varied asdirected by the COMPANY. Determination of maximum density and optimummoisture by modified compaction is included and will not be paid as a separateitem. Pay items will include CBR 3-point, unsoaked and CBR 3-point, soaked (4days surcharged, with swell measurements taken daily).

APPROVE!>

F.IIV-E&DDENG. SUI'POHT I>IV.

CSM

F. ChemicalAnalysis'0" "

OPERATING nEPARTMENT

Chemical tests shall be performed for water soluble salts as a percent by weight ofdried sample at 105°C to include sodium, potassium, sulfate, chloride ions andsodium chloride.

G. Other Testing

Other laboratory testing than that described above will be required for materialsquality control. Such tests are included in Schedule ~ with appropriate ASTM orother Standard designation.

2.11 LABORATORY TEST RECORDS!)An, ~l-.9-26


All laboratory measurements and observations made for each test shall be recorded ina near, legible manner or forms appropriate to the test being performed. Forms usedfor this purpose are subject to the approval of the COMPANY. Copies of test data willbe provided to the COMPANY upon request. Original test data will be preserved for aperiod of three years after submitting the test results to the COMPANY or for a lesserperiod if authorized by the COMPANY to destroy the data earlier.

*** END OF SECTION -11 ***



SAUDI ARABIA

.JOB ORDER NO.


35A IAPPENDIX-XVII OF 0

49

'"''"'"uco~«co'"'"u

z0f=0..;:U'"'"Q

0z .., ....

REVISIONS

,'RI:I'ARED'''' ~I>An, 2C1I2.09.".

C""~I!V,

APPROV[O

EHV.F.&I>I>

ENC. SUppORT I>IV.

M/CSM

20!Z.09.26

OPI:RATING OI:PARTMI:NT

!>An, 211'1-09.'

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FOI~CONSTRUCTION OR

FOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED ANI) I)ATEI)

.IOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~J~\ ~~\

SECTION111-GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL LOGS

3.01 GENERAL

-

Final logs shall be prepared using information and pertinent results from field logs andresults of laboratory and/or field tests including Standard Penetration Test values.Overburden materials shall be classified according to ASTM 02487, "Classification ofSoils for Engineering Purposes"; and, ASTM 02488, "Description of Soils (Visual-ManualProcedures)", for all investigations other than those, which are primarily intended forevaluation of subgrade soils for pavement design. Soil designations and Group Symbolsshall be used on all logs, conforming to the Unified Soil Classification as outlined on Table111-1,attached. Rock classification shall be based on standard geologic terminology withapplicable descriptive adjectives or numbers as shown on Table 111-2,attached. Subgradesoils will be classified in accordance with ASTM 03282, "Classification of Soils and SoilAggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes". Elevation and depths shall beshown for any change of material, weathering, top of rock and bottom of hole. Otherpertinent information will be provided on the logs as described in the followingparagraphs.

ROUNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA



49

,.:~uQ

~..,Q'""u

z0f=..Q;u'"'"Q

0z

REVISIONS

~21112.119.2<>

APPROVt:l)

EHY.E&IWENG. sUPPOIn DIY.

CSM

21112.119.2<>


DATE, ...9.


JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:.4~ ~..I~\ ~y1J1

Unified Soil Classification System

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICALINVESTIGATIONAND MATERIALTESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

Primary Divisions for Field and GroupTypical Names

Laboratory Classification Supplementary Criteria

Laboratorv Identification Svmbol Criteria for Visual IdentificationClean

Coarse-grained Gravel. Gravels. GW Welt graded gravels. C" = 00010" Wide range in grain sizesoils (More (More than (Less than gravel-sandthan half 5% mixtures. and substantial amounthalf of material of the coarse of material little or no fine. greater than 4 of alt intermediatefiner than 3. fraction isinch larger smaller than particle size.

than No 4 No. 200sieve is larger sieve sieve C, = .moor

than No. 200 size about size.) 0'0 x 060

between 1 and 3GP Poorly graded Not meeting both Predominantly one size

gravels. gravel.sand criteria for GW (uniformly graded) ormixtures. little or no a range of sizes withfines. some intermediate sizes

missino (oao oraded)'Atterberg Atterberg

Gravels with GM Silly gravels. limits limits Nonplastic fines orbelow "A" above "A"

. do. . do. fines. (More and gravel.sand. line, line fines of low plasticity.or PI less with PI

than 12%of silt mixtures. than 4 between4 & 7 is

material border.Atterberg

smalter than GC Clayey gravels, and limits line case Plastic finesNo. 200 above "A"sieve gravel-sand-clay line. GM.GC

and PIsize.)' mixtures. greater

than 7Clean

Sands (More sands SW Welt graded sands. C" = 00010" Wide range in grainthan half of (Less than

-do- the 5% gravelty sands, sizes and substantialcoarsefraction of material little or no fines' greater than 6 amounts of alt inter.is smalterthan smalter than mediate particle sizes

No. 200No. 4 sieve sieve C, = .moorsize) size) 0'0 x 0..

between 1 and 3SP Poorly graded sands Not meeting both Predominately one size

and gravelly sands. criteria for SW (uniformly graded) or alittle or no fines' range of sizes with

some intermediate sizes

missino (oao oraded)Atterberg Atterberg

Sands with SM Silly sands, sand- limits limits Nonplastic fines orbelow "A" above "A"

.do. -do. fines. (More sill mixtures. line. line fines of low plasticity.or PI less with PI

than 12% of than 4 betweenAtterberg 4 & 7 is

material SC Clayey sands, limits border- Plastic finesabove "A"

smalter than sand.clay mixtures line, line caseNo. 200 with PIsieve greater SM-SCsize)' Ihan 7

Tough.Reactio

ML n ness.Atterberg

Inorganic silts. very limits Dry to NearSilts and below "A" Atterbergclays. fine sands, rock line. limits Strenglh Shaking Plastic

or PI less above "A"(Liquid limit less than 50) flour, silly or clayey than 4 line Limit

Fine grained with PIsoils fine sands between None to Quick to None(More than half 4 & 7 isof border. slight slowmaterials is line casesmalter than CL Inorganicclays of Atterberg ML.CL Medium None to Medium

PLANT NOJ INDEX I DOCUMENTNO. I PAGE NO. REV.

IAPPENDIX. XVII37

A OF 0

49

;-:~uQ

~

Q

~Ci

z0f:"-

i:2uen'"'"

0z

REVISIONS

CII

APPROVED

HIV-E&DDENG. SUPpORT IHV.

1£21112-119-26

CSM

21112-119-26

OI'ERATING (}EPARTMENT

, .-7 =nt --"~(}ATE, -..9-Z(,

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORI>ERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.IOB ORI>ER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 9-L:~ ~J~\ 4.5y:;J\

.Materials with 5 to 12 percent smaller than No. 200 sieve are borderline cases. designaled: GW-GM. SW-SC. etc

I P LA~TICITY CHART I I'"

ED

I... I/r I,... I'" I:r I~",~ ." " =~ ,~ n~..,

LJ:IJ_'L[\>]T LL:.OTE"...I. ~1I.:>i~~'tAI

~ . ,...o,L~.c., .:-1. ,"..., ..'II~", ",ltJ,...,-,: :-. "'f}! 1"1.

TABLE III- 1

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

No. Iow limits to

above "A"200 sieve size.) - do - to medium plasticity; line. high very

with PI(Visual: more gravelly clays. silty greater slow

than half of clays. sandy clays. than 7

particles are so lean clavs.

fine that they OL Organic silts and Slightcannot be seen - do - organic silt-clays Atterberg limits below "A" line. to Slow Slight

mediumbv naked eve.) of low Dlasticilv.

MH Inorganic silts. mica- Slight Slow Slightceous or

- do - Silts and clays. (liquid limit diatomaceous Atterberg limits below "A" line. to to tomedium

greater than 50.) fine sands or silts. none medium.

elastic silts.

Inorganicclays ofCH high High None High

- do - - do - plasticity. fat clays. Atterberg limits above "A" line. to veryhiah

OH Organic clays of Medium None 10 Slight- do - medium to high Atterberg limits below "A" line. to very to

Dlasticitv hiah slow mediumPeat. muck and

Pt other High ignition loss. LL and PI Organic calor and odor.- do - Highly organic soil highly organic soils. decrease after drying. spongy feel. frequently

fibrous texture.

/ V<:."

I('/ V§-"./ V1;;:!.0I.. LL

./.+' ['O'v.'J'I 'I

.".1/// /'

/ ./hJ/

.m.-1<c'Iioa:

/::E:."',,,,

/'::;,::;; ,-,,wm ,,. «:""'...

8. /.......","',. "'0'''' /: - ,.. '.u'Ir.1 "'l:K" -I"::>"

0" r"1 /""- /. /' r(..v:I<C,'o.or'l.-:£:>!;,-,,='.,-" >T>""'n - ""..<S,'"

,/ /,, :Y.//

:t;t, LL

/ '/ ,/ ,. '" :,]II"L -<

,/y ./V '.. LU.'

./ ILrPil

PLANT NOJ INDEX I DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO, REV.

38A IAPPENDIX.XVII OF 0

49

'"''""'u

Q

~"'Q'"'"'-'

z01="-0::uen'""

0z

REVISIONS

A!"'ROVED

EHV-E&IHJ

ENG. SUpPORT DIV.

ctJt/CSM

211/2-1)9.26


DATE, 'fII2-09-26


.lOB ORDER NO,

SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY ~~~ ~J~I ~y1J'

TABLE 111-2

RQUNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICALINVESTIGATIONAND MATERIALTESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

S)IT£dRM Apr4;;ai;tEd;:,tpPlel

1}i!:"¥.'>]ttml1"fr.S ![;!yt.J:;:f]sic.I;;r,,;rti.;ofKr.!S Ex.JJ;7P'EG...,sni.bx. i'"""tllT'!!;i!E;;

': g;)lj3TCIIE Bddr.;Cbf1f>- \ Il'ai1!Q;:

tErlS'.",

J IM31e

lT:;;I.

C&I!..

(}()\%'ACnCN

sU;;;'CE\12>'E) Isij,{j£""" IliEIL\?J;.1E I ,.I ...........""""".' "..t..................., '".

xx';:'cLy'" ", rH I:,iHcEml LC€EXMPlE

Itl ---.....,"':' ISH-LE 1-I3.a

Scl C"if:!al:i"".0

12.8.7<,22.e1"li.,34.3

... Q ifJ: g, ..._, "...,

0ICE\I?i1E n,v,m-.It Q. " t::::::::::::::

Q':;

BE.12:-;..

.. Q..il \,r "

2 F.mr 1!2<,4" "'":0

1!1 £lus<d ;;.:_;,;; ICLY 1,03,r .t:

t " nxxu::I 0.1 .,.:;

.. ",,,,-",w 0 ','........'.s\1:'§'K!;E' rg.'if2'0 Sk..:i"r 12JI='i.<lt'iE[ !.hJl:" >.-'I E;\

I 7 ::BL,t,13% ;;..I :.>/' i3t.. "

0 e" !kI Q\,:I sit: .2

IQ 0,.. .v

IGilA\DE\I<i"

1 I11. ... . (I I I.,.'.. ). .

LbWEatb-.,;+...

I

ami{'1;'ri\6:d"':" I ICn,Wocs"'"

.1

R

.

I- b..

'!:.,:ip!,;:l,Q, J I'us;;<1f«ipert-i1i'Jf1>tEr I

=+I

:NCiT8Sc1\SAMESOIJRCH.BTABLEIiI-1I i f:::I2.i'SNf.CUBRCcKtiDr COMMDNt.Y Et,WJN7EFG; iNE.4."TffiNPRCI','iNCE I j I.. .. ,,, w"" ""'" , .., " ,

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.'

REV,

39lA IAPPENDIX. XVII OF 0

49

'"''"'"uQ

~...Q'"co

z0>="-02uen'"Q

0z '" '"

REVISIONS

PREPARED'JY, I~DATE, 012-09-2(,

CIIJ<.If>ny,

APP'WYE!>

EHV-E<~DnENG. SUI'pORT nlv.

UI.t/CSM

2012-09-26

OPERATING DE"AlnMENT

-.....

DATE, '°"-°9.2

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR OIWERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.Ion ORDER NO.


3.02 DENSITY OF SOILS

The density of coarse grained cohesion less soils and silts shall be described inaccordance with the following, where applicable:

A. Test Pits

1) Loose Easily excavated with hand shovel

2) Compact. Difficult to excavate with hand shovel

3) Dense Must be loosened with pick to excavate with hand shovel

-B. Soil Borings

Where Standard Penetration Test (SPT) results are available and the penetrationresistance does not appear to be influenced by other factors (e.g., rock fragments,cementation, etc.), the density may be described in accordance with the followingpresumptive relationship:

PRESUMPTIVE DENSITYNUMBER OF BLOWS (N)PER 305 mm (12 in.)

Very Loose 0-5

Loose 6 - 11

Medium 12 - 23

Dense 24 - 35

Very Dense 36 - 50

(Not applicable withoutFurther description) Over 50

3.03 CONSISTENCY OF SOILS

The consistency of cohesive clays and silts (where applicable) shall be described inaccordance with the following:

A. Test Pits

1) Very Soft - Easily penetrated several inches by fist

2) Soft - Easily penetrated several inches by thumb

3) Medium - Can be penetrated several inches by thumb with moderate effort

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO.I NO.IREV.


49

,.:~u

Q

~-<Q'":I:U

z0;::"-02uen'"Q

0z '" M

REVISIONS

PRE"ARE!) BY, ~IJATL 2012-09-2"

CUYIJBY,

APPROYEI}

EHY-E&I)I)ENG. SUPPORT DIY.

atJ/CSM

2012-09-2"

OPERATlNC IJEPARTMENT

CERTIFIED

BY~~"AI<

DATE, 2012-09-2"

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO liE USED FOR

CONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDEIHNGMATERIALS lINTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.lOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ A.;..I~\ ~y:;J\

4) Very Stiff - Readily indented by thumbnail

5) Hard - Indented with difficulty by thumbnail

B. Soil Borings

-

The consistency of cohesive soils encountered in test borings shall be describedprimarily on the basis of unconfined compressive strength either from actual laboratorytests or estimated strength of samples based on pocket penetrometer results or theevaluations described in paragraph A, above. Consistency descriptions are shownbelow for various ranges of unconfined compressive strength. The use of SPT valueswithout benefit of other evaluations is not acceptable. Where supporting data isavailable, correlations of presumptive SPT/consistency relationship should beestablished for a given location or site. Where adequate data are not available, theconsistency may be described on the basis of the presumptive relationship shownbelow, only if it is clearly indicated on the log as such:

CONSISTENCY

RANGE OF UNCONFINEDCOMPRESSIVE STRENGTH NO. OF BLOWS (N)

t/fe or kq/cm2 PER 305 mm (12 in.)

Very SoftSoftMedium StiffStiffVery StiffHard

Less than 0.250.25 to 0.500.50 to 1.001.00 to 2.002.00 to 4.00Greater than 4.00

Less than 22 to 45 to 89 to 1516 to 30

Greater than 30

3.04 CEMENTED OVERBURDEN MATERIALS

The nature and degree of cementation shall be completely described. The terminologyused to describe cementation shall be defined in the report.

3.05 ROCK

After identification of major rock type on the log, the physical properties shall be describedin accordance with descriptive adjectives or numbers as shown in Table 111-2and in thefollowing sequence:

A. Bedding Characteristics - including thin beds or interbedded materials ofdifferent types of rock

B. Lithologic Characteristics

C. Hardness and Degree of Cementation

D. Texture

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°1INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

,.:~uQ

~~

Q'""u

z0;::"-0;:U<n'"Q

0z '" N

REVISIONS

"REI'A,u:n '3Y, ~nATE, ~CIIIQI') BY,

APPROYEn

EHV-E&DDENG. SU""ORT ,>IV.

{J1J/CSM

2012-09-26

OPERATING nE"A.nMF.NT

CERTlFlEn

nAlE, '""-"9-'

nlls DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FOI{CONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCEHTIFIED AND DATED

.JOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~j~1 4..sy1J\

E. Structure (including Degree of Fracturing and/or Fragmentation)

F. Degree of Weathering

G. Solution and Void Conditions

H. Swelling Properties

I. Slaking Properties

3.06 FIELD NOTES AND RECORDS-

All notes recorded on field logs pertinent to the evaluation and analysis of subsurfaceconditions shall be transcribed on the final logs, with particular emphasis on ground waterconditions and general drilling operations experienced in test borings. Other records andobservations, including subsequent variations in piezometric records of ground waterelevations shall also be incorporated in the final logs where applicable.

3.07 FINAL LOGS

Examples of final logs of test borings and test pits are illustrated on Plates 111-1and 111-1a,utilizing COMPANY Standard Form 15109 (11/83). Blank copies of these forms will beavailable to the CONTRACTOR as needed for specific PROJECTS.

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANTN°iINDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO.I

REV.


49

,.:1:3u

"~-<"'":I:U

z01=..etuU')'"Q

0z

REVISIONS

PREPAREDBY, RJ)L)NI'r

DATE, --><.. "'12.",.2(,CII"~" v.

APPROVED

EI1\'.E&ooENC,SUI'I'ORTDlV,

cdVCSM

'''12.09.26


DATE, '1J12.0<).2(,

THIS DRAWING IS NOTTO BE USED FORCONSTlHlCTlON ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

JOB ORDER NO,

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ..4~ ~J~I 4.sy;J\

PLATE \11-1

ROUNFP/CSM - 2012/09/26

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONAND MATERIALTESTING

SAUDI ARABIA

SEG RORING LOG

PROJECT No,

LOCATION: ICGNTRAC,OR:

COORDlNA n:SlNQRTl-I: TYPE OF BORING: BORING NO.IFAST: DlA. OF BORING:

GROUND E! EVA.j ION: DIA.OF UNDISTVR8EIJSAMPLE: DATE COMMEf>i'DEO::

DEPTH AT GRO!JN'D1N.ATER TABLE: - C,A£!Nl(3 HpJ....ftffi 1NL &.DROP: OAT!: COMF'Li::,ED:

MEASUREDAT: HOURS. ON SAMPLING HAMMERIT & DROP: SUPERVISOR:

11:' ffi i- }: r{ 5'" to;;:: ;r Ir ;'-'

$J ji;"" ,fi: ,. ¥ bF1i:;j

u, I), :;, [} 2:!: d J" ::';; ,,"'. :<: g; <1'-' ;} iF W '" [ DESCRIPTWf{ REMARKS"" ii)ID

« '" an "" (':;11

<'1Er"" r,

, Q 3 .,'\'::::. jjo 0 fh

;1.j <) '" "6<Ij

£)

-

- 6

2

---1

-

-

---2

12-

- 26--

-!

-gl 33

lEGE ):SPT 1: STANDARD PENETRATIONTEST& NUMBERU t: UNDISTURBEDTHINWALLTUSE S.AMPLE&NUMBERR t: RO-:::KCORE RUN &.NU\',tSER0 t: DENtS-ONSAMPLE &NUMBERROD : ROCKQ'JALlTY DESIGNATiONREC : RE03VERY SHEET '> OF:;;

PLANT NOJ INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO, I PAGENO.I

REV.


49

,..::;:u

Q

~~

Q'""u

z0f:"-i:2uU)"'Q

0z

REVISIONS

PI<EPAI<£ORY, !f0t.:

DAn:, A 2""-"'-26

CII~" v

,\PI'ROVED

EIIV-E&DOENG. SlIl'I'OHT I)IV.

Ltf/CSM

''''2-'''-21,


CERTIFIeD

I!~'\I<

RATE, '!1I2-"'-'

THIS IJRAWING IS NOTTO DE USED FORCONSTRlICTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIEIJ AND DATEIJ

.IOB ORDER NO.

SAUDIELECTRICITYCOMPANY ~L:~ ~J~\ ~y1.I\

SEC BORING LOG

PROJEC; 110,

SIATlON!COORDH,mORJH: EOR!N3NO,RAGTOR:

Z ~

.~ .. ,,' >, "" Q j1J(;!I1'rc i\:~ffi ~~t;;~ g ~ .II!

.;~t:.c,",!!j"-.".r.~,'~ "<- '"F ,~ ~ ,; ~ i;;, ~ ~ ~ W !1fi:;i '?- ~ DHCRIPT.ON REMARKS :-,.

W~c:i{'5~T$ii!t\'~P;i1 .~ m itQ ~ :l.i;,,! ~Rf;:tt 0 ~J IT;

;;, DJ --("Q"'~ ~ C

-=-..J.!

~ ~

"~

43-

T~c--

~ ~

,A-,,~

~'..-

~ 2

,

~

~

:mLEGEND:

SPT 1: STANDARDPENETRATiOtHEST 2.NUMBERU 1: UNDISTURBEDTHIN 'NALLTUBESA.MPLE,&NUMBER

R 1: ROCKCORE RUN & NUMBERD f: DEN/SONSAMPLE& NUMBER

ROD: ROCKQUALITYDESIGNATIONREC RECOVERY SHE"'T 2 OF :2

PLATE III -1a

*** END OF SECTION-Ill ***



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENTNO. NO,I

REV.


49

,.:~uQ

~-<

Q

:.G

z01=Q.,aiu'"'"Q

0z .., M

REVISIONS

"RHAREI>BY, ~()ATE, 2012-09-26

CH 10<5 BY,

AI'PROY>:!>

EIIV-E&DDENG. SUPPORT I)IV.

tilL!CSM

2012-119-26

OPERATING ()EPARTMENT

C>:RTI :()

B:~()ATE, 2012-09-26


./OB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4~ ~J~I ~y1J'

SECTION IV- GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

4.01 GENERAL

The wide variation of the scope of services required for individual COMPANY PROJECTSprecludes the use of a single format for all PROJECTS. However, most investigations willbe considered to be either Preliminarv Investiqations or, Detailed Investiqations for FinalDesiqn; and, the report should be so identified where applicable. These Guidelines outlinethe general format for reports for both types of investigations- the reports differing only inthe scope of WORK included therein.

- 4.02 SCOPE

The results of the investigations shall be presented in a final report, which shall be writtenfor the purpose of assisting and guiding designers in making their decisions. Discussion ofbroad regional physiographic and geological features will be limited to the tangibleengineering significance and a reasonable understanding of these features in theselection of a site and determination of the appropriate design. The discussion shall befocused principally on description of rock, soil and ground water conditions that aresignificant in the design or will affect construction. The discussion shall be supplementedby geologic maps, cross-sections and boring logs as applicable to clearly illustrateexisting conditions and the relationships of these conditions to the PROJECT. In supportof its conclusions, the discussion shall present the result of field and laboratoryinvestigations in relation to the designs recommended in development of the PROJECT.The report shall contain specific design recommendations. Technical terms used in thereport shall be clearly defined and used consistently throughout the report. Where variablesubsurface conditions exist, generalized recommendations will not be satisfactory.Specific recommendations will be made for specific PROJECT areas or variations infoundation conditions.

4.03 FORMAT

The final report shall consist of, but not limited to, an effective combination of discussions,tabulated data, laboratory testing results, backup calculations, soil and geologicalillustrations, and reference bibliography to depict the conditions that are of engineeringsignificance. The discussion in the foundation report should always include alternatefoundation systems. The presentation shall include the following:

A. Summary

As a preamble to the report, a cover letter in the form of a summary shall be prepared.This letter shall summarize the site description, the surface and subsurface soilconditions and properties, the resulting engineering considerations, andrecommendations for design of foundations and other elements of constructioninfluenced by subsurface conditions.

ROL/NFP/CSM - 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA


IAPPENDIX. XVII45

A OF 0

49

"~u

Q

~"'Q'""u

z0f:"-a:u'"'"Q

0:z: .., M

REVISIONS

PI<EI'AI<ED RV, ~IJATE, 2012-09-26

CUK:AfRV,

APPROVt:I>

EHV-E&DDENG- SUI'I'ORT DlV.

wCSM

2012-09-2"

O"ERATlNG IJEPARTMENT

,

IJATE, 2012-09-2"


.IOB ORDER NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY s:-4~ ~J~\ 4J;~\

B. Scope of Work

The Scope of Work shall describe the type of design information that is to be furnishedby the report; e.g., for design of foundations for overhead transmission lines, substationbuildings or other types of structures, slabs-on-grade, roads, parking areas, deepexcavations, pipelines, buried cables, cable tunnels, etc., as well as the description ofthe scope of the investigation conducted by the CONTRACTOR.

-

C. PROJECT Description

The PROJECT Description shall include the geographic location of the site with respectto existing landmarks, populated areas, etc., the type of construction; the structuralcharacteristics including the allowable total and differential settlement; moments,thrusts (including uplift) and vibratory loads imposed on foundations; nearness toexisting or planned structures; and any other special foundation design considerations.Where some elements of the PROJECT description are not known at the time of thepreparation of the report, the COMPANY shall provide best estimates for theseelements and the report shall clearly indicate that these are estimates.

D. Site Conditions

The existing surface conditions at site shall be described as to grades, access,drainage and/or any other feature, which may have a bearing on the WORK, including,where appropriate:

1) Significant and controlling topographic conditions

2) Geomorphology

3) Existing construction and/or evidence of previous constructions and man-made sitealterations (e.g., grading, dumping, etc.)

4) Vegetation and land use

5) Evidence of ground water and water levels in existing wells or exposures

E. Field Investigations

The section on Field Investigation shall describe the type of equipment used; thenumber, location, diameter and depth of borings or other types of explorations; theworking procedures; sampling methods and frequency; and type of field testsperformed. Where piezometers have been installed, the type, depth and location, aswell as an accurate as-installed drawing of each piezometer shall be included. Logs ofexplorations and the results of all field tests shall also be part of this section. Thissection may be presented in a separate volume if voluminous.

F. Laboratorv Tests

The section on Laboratory Tests shall contain a description of the sample extractionprocedure, the type of tests performed and all test results. This section may also bepresented in a separate volume if voluminous.



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT NOJ INDEX I DOCUMENT NO. I PAGE NO.I REV.-


49

,.:a:'"U

0

::~

0'":tU

2:0f::'"i:2uen"'Q

02:

'" M

REVISIONS

"R£I'ARW IlV, ~DATE, 2II12.(l9.2!>

CIIK)!) 'lV,

ArrROVED

EHV.E&DI)ENG. S!JI'I'ORT DlV.

UP!CSM

2(112.(I'.2!>

orERATING DErARTMENT

0:0"''''' El

~~/

BY, MOIIAMMA

,wrE, "1I2.(l9.2!>


JOB ORDER NO.

-

--...SAFFAR


G. Subsurface Conditions

The section of Subsurface Conditions shall give a detailed description of thesubsurface materials at the site. Ground water conditions (including artesian) shall bediscussed. Drawings of subsurface profiles shall be included where necessary ordesirable to illustrate subsurface conditions. Where appropriate, this section shall alsoinclude: description of geology with a special discussion concerning composition andstructure of the rocks; engineering description of soils and the relationship of soil to thebedrock; principal engineering properties of the rock and soil as determined byconventional field and laboratory investigations; and, foundation conditions that presentspecial engineering problems.

H. EnqineerinqAnalvsis

The section on Engineering Analysis shall contain a description of the geotechnicalconsiderations involved in developing a suitable foundation system for the PROJECTstructures. A statement of the analysis performed to evaluate the foundationrequirements and the results of these analyses, shall be included, as well as a study ofalternate foundation systems where applicable. Settlement criteria and the results ofsettlement analyses shall be described. Consideration of ground water and its chemicaleffect on foundation concrete and rebar shall be discussed. Ground water, as related toexcavations and to foundations located near or below the ground water table, shall bediscussed. For all foundation cases, the factor of safety employed in the analysis, shallbe stated; and, both "ultimate" and "allowable" values of the appropriate geotechnicaldesign parameters shall be provided. "Net-allowable" stresses shall be defined.Specific geotechnical parameters to be used for design shall be supported bycomputations based on an acceptable method of analysis. Computations do not needto be included in the report but, shall be retained in permanent files by theCONTRACTOR; and, copies provided to the COMPANY upon request. Alternatefoundation designs shall be presented along with consideration of constructionproblems and current use of foundation construction techniques as practiced in theSEC System.

I. Recommendations

The section on Recommendations shall give clear, concise, positive recommendationsof the design criteria for each type of foundations, which is to be used, to govern thedesign of all foundations for the PROJECT; and, shall give specific recommendationsfor the design of other elements of construction, which may be influenced bygeotechnical considerations, as defined in the scope of WORK for a given PROJECT.Where appropriate, this shall include:

1) Bearing capacities for various types of shallow foundations, e.g. spread footings,mat, thickened edge slab, etc. Recommend type best suited for site.

2) Deep foundation capacities; including drilled piers, caissons, driven piles, augered(bored) piles, etc. Discuss tension, compression and lateral capacity of foundationsystem. For augered (bored) pile foundation free-head pile type, provide pile

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.I

REV.


49

""'"u

Q

~~

Q""u

z

E:;:uif;'"Q

0z .., N

REVISIONS

PREPARED RV, ~DATE, X 2012-09-'6

CH~' '-

APPROVED

EHV-E&DDENG. SUPPORT DIV.

t#CSM

2012-09-'6

OPERATING DEI'ARTMENI

v

'>ATE, 'on-09-'

THIS ORAWING IS NOTTO liE USED FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORDERINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTIFIED AND DATED

.JOII ORDER NO.

-

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4~ ~..I~\ 4.sy13\

capacities and P-Y curves with a minimum of three (3) pile diameters with three (3)varying pile length for each pile diameter.

3) Estimated foundation settlements or swell

4) CBR and "K" values for pavement and floor slab design

5) Lateral earth pressures (active, passive, at-rest, etc.)

6) Potential seismic and dynamic soil problems

7) Slope stability, soil and rock

8) Site development including site preparation and filling

9) Foundation and subsurface construction excavation

10) Ground water considerations

11) Drilling and blasting problems

12) Rock bolting and anchoring problems

13) Special foundation treatments, e.g. surcharging, unsuitable material replacement,grouting, etc.

14) Recommended elevation for foundations

15) Recommendations for further investigation and analysis, if required

16) Recommendations for soil improvement (Vibro-replacement, Vibroflotation, DynamicCompaction, Stone Columns, and any other widely accepted soil improvementtechniques.)

J. Certification

Both the engineer responsible for the foundation analysis and a principal of theCOMPANY shall certify the accuracy of the contents of the report by affixing theirsignatures thereto.

K. Illustrations

The illustrations provided with the report do not necessarily require a separate section.Illustrative material including any of the following that are applicable to the PROJECTwill be used in the final report.

1) PROJECT Location Map

2) Plan of Exploration

ROL/NFP/CSM- 2012/09/26


SAUDI ARABIA



49

;-:1::u

Q

::"'Q'""u

z0;::0..02uen'"Q

0z '" '"

REVISIONS

PREPARED BV, ~DATE'.A. 21112-119-'6

ClrG.1V, ~

A"I'ROVED

EHV-E&DI)ENC. SUPPORT DIV.

Id/CSM

'"12-"9-'6


:w~ ---BV, MOIIAMMA1U\lrSAFFAR

DATE, '(112-09-26

THIS HRAWING IS NOTTO BE USF;H FORCONSTRUCTION ORFOR ORHF;RINGMATERIALS UNTILCERTlFIF:H ANH HATEH

.JOB OIWF;R NO.

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY s:-4~ ~J~\ 4..sy;J\

3) Logs of Explorations

4) Test Data and Resulting Charts

5) Site Geology Map

6) Top of Rock Contour Map

7) Geologic Structure Map

-8) Soils and/or rock cross-sections shall show correlation of overburden and rock units

including such significant features as water levels, water losses, core losses, andsolution zones. Cross-sections shall emphasize geologic structure, show depths ofprimary and secondary weathering, and interpret top of rock for constructionpurposes.

9) Photographs of all rock cores recovered as well as photos illustrating pertinent siteconditions. All photos shall have the following information on the back of the photoor under the photo, if it is mounted: Name of PROJECT, site location, date of photo,CONTRACTOR, location of photographer and direction that the photo is viewing, abrief description of main points in photo, name of photographer, a sequentialnumber for each photo and notes showing if photo is a "Pan-View". An arrowshowing number, location and direction of the photo will be noted on the plan ofexplorations for the PROJECT. Negatives for field photos and core photos will beretained by the CONTRACTOR in a permanent file.

*** END OF SECTION - IV ***

REFERENCES:

1. Lambe - Soil Testing for Engineers2. ASTM - Procedures for Testing Soils



SAUDI ARABIA

PLANT N°1

INDEX

I DOCUMENT NO. NO.I

REV.

49A I APPENDIX - XVII OF I 0

49

SOF-RCValdez

Placed Image

Final Pts 12cc348

Documents

Transcript of Final Pts 12cc348